Bently Nevada Part Number 163861-01, Rev NC

TM
SYSTEM 1 S O F T WA R E

U s e r ’s G u i d e
 Copyright (C) 2002 Bently Nevada, LLC. All rights reserved.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC in

the United States and Other Countries:

ACM™, Actionable Information®, Actionable Information to the Right

People at the Right Time®, ADRE®, ™, Asset Condition Management™,
Asset Condition Monitoring™, Bently ALIGN™, Bently BALANCE®,
Bently DOCUVIEW™, Bently LUBE™, Bently Nevada®, Bently
PERFORMANCE™, Bently RELIABILITY™, CableLoc™,
ClickLoc™, Data Manager®, Decision SupportSM, DemoNet™, Dynamic
Data Manager®, Engineer Assist™, FieldMonitor™, flexiTIM™,
FluidLoc®, Helping You Protect and Manage All Your Machinery®,
HydroScan®, HydroView™, Key Ø®, Keyphasor®, Machine Condition
Manager™ 2000, MachineLibrary™, Machine Manager™,
MicroPROX®, Move Data, Not People®, Move Information, Not Data™,
NSv™, Prime Spike™, PROXPAC®, Proximitor®, REBAM®,
RuleDesk™, SE™, Seismoprobe®, Smart Monitor®, Snapshot™,
System 1™, System Extender™, TDXnet™, TDIXconnX™, The Plant
Asset Management CompanySM, TipLoc™, TorXimitor®, Transient Data
Manager®, Trendmaster®, TrimLoc™, Velomitor®

Bently Nevada's orbit logo and other logos associated with the trademarks in bold
above, are also all trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada in the
United States and other countries.

Protected by U.S. Patents 5,905,989; 6,421,571; other patents pending.

Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

MODBUS™ is a trademark of Schneider Electric.

OLE for Process Control® is a registered trademark of OPC Foundation.

Contents

Introduction vii
Layout of this User’s Guide vii
How to use this guide viii
Special Warnings ix
Menu items ix
Help application references ix

1 What Is System 1™ ? 1
System 1 Overview 1
Data Acquisition 4
Databases 4
Configuration 8
Display 9
System 1 Tools 10
System 1 Extenders 11

2 Starting Data Acquisition 13

Starting System 1 13
System 1 security and User Rights 15
Verifying that SQL Server is running 15
Quickly determining the status of a DAQ computer 16
The Data Acquisition Connection Manager 17
Launching the Data Acquisition Connection Manager 17
Starting data acquisition 18
Verifying that data modules are working properly 22

3 Starting Display 25
Before starting Display 25
Starting Display 26
Connecting to an Enterprise 26
iv Contents

Connecting to an Enterprise the easy way: Quick Connect 26

Connecting using the Display menu 28
How to connect to an Enterprise the first time 30
How to configure an Enterprise for Quick Connect 34
Disabling Quick Connect 37
Verifying that Display is receiving data 37

4 A Guided Tour of the Display Environment 39

Introduction 40
The Display window 40
Hierarchies and Views 40
Controlling the visibility of Toolbars 44
Customizing toolbars 45
Creating a custom menu item and toolbar 45
Linking applications to Enterprise components 48
Layouts and the View menu 50
Groups, Areas, Plants, and Buildings 50
Machine trains and machine components 52
Custom Assets 53
Examining the properties of objects in the hierarchy 53
Points and Variables 55
Types of Points 58
Orphaned Points 59
The Instrument Hierarchy 60
Setting Hierarchy Filters 62
Deleting Hierarchy Filters 64
Routes 64
Associations 65
Collection Groups 66
Plot and Bargraph Session Managers 68

5 Alarms and Events 69

What is an event? 70
What is an alarm? 71
Alarm color and severity 71
Protection (hardware) alarms 72
Management (software) alarms 73
Blinking colors: new events or alarms 74
The stoplight icon: Point Status notifications 76
Before acting on an alarm or Point Status 77
Locating the source of the problem 78
The Current Alarms Display 80
 Contents v

Power tool: the Event Manager 82

Filtering information in the Event Manager 85
Event Manager shortcuts 89
Using Bargraphs to examine current data 90
Stopping blinking: Acknowledging events 93
Alarms from portable data collectors 94
Using the Journal Editor to document action 96
Viewing basic alarm settings 98
Viewing Spectral Band settings 102
Viewing Acceptance Region settings 104
Inhibiting alarms during Transient events 105
Configuring alarm sounds 107

6 Controlling Data Collection 109

Data collection in System 1 109
Data collection rates during normal operation 110
Change Filtering: reducing data storage requirements 112
Collection Groups and data collection during alarms 116
Data collection during transient operation 122
Collecting Reference Data 124
Examining, adding, and deleting Reference Data 126
Uploading data from a Snapshot™ portable data collector 129
Manual data entry 136

7 Data Plots 139

Introduction to data plotting in System 1 141
Plot Sessions, Bargraph Sessions, and Plot Groups 143
Setting the Default Data Range for plots 143
Starting a new Plot Session 146
Getting data from a historical event 148
Adding plots to a new Plot Session 149
Other ways to create plots 152
Saving a Plot Session 156
Renaming Plot Groups and Plot Sessions 156
Reopening an existing Plot Session 157
Adding or deleting data in Plot Sessions 158
Understanding the Plot Group window 160
Moving through time 164
Displaying multiple plots in a Plot Group 164
Scaling and more: the Plot Group Configuration window 168
Changing Variables for a curve 177
Compensating plots 178
vi Contents

Overlaying data from different events 181

Formatting lines and plot colors, and controlling visibility 182
Adding notes to a plot 184
Plot shortcuts 186
Sample Filtering 186
Closing Plot Group windows 188
Plot formats in System 1 188
Trend plots 190
Bode and polar plots 192
Shaft Centerline plots 195
X vs Y plots 201
Orbit and timebase plots 203
Half and full spectrum plots 213
Spectrum cascade and waterfall plots 222
Tabular lists 228
Reciprocating plots, rod position plots and Variables 231
Creating reciprocating plots 241
Creating a rod position plot 254
Copying plots and other information 256
Printing plots 256
Custom Bargraph Sessions 259
Customizing the appearance of Bargraphs 262

8 Getting The Most From Your System 1™ Software 265

Introduction 266
I see blinking colors. What do they mean and what do I do? 266
How do I determine what is going on now? 268
How do I determine how my Enterprise behaved in the past? 272
How do I compare today’s behavior with yesterday’s? 275
How do I view data along a machine train? 280
How do I correlate data from different sources? 282
How do I find and look at my startup or shutdown data? 285
Why did my machine train trip last night? 289
An alarm occurred last night. Why? 291
This data is interesting. How do I save it for future reference? 291

Index 293
Introduction

System 1 software is a powerful and flexible platform that consists of several building blocks. It
integrates the capabilities of previous Bently Nevada applications and provides expanded func-
tionality so that you can manage all of your plant assets within a single software platform. System
1 software has been developed to integrate many condition-monitoring devices and technologies
into a single platform with a single display environment and a common database structure. System
1 software implements a highly modular architecture that facilitates the expansion of data acquisi-
tion capabilities and allows the addition of other machinery and asset management tools.

This User’s Guide is designed for anyone who will use the System 1 platform to manage plant
assets and information, including plant managers, instrumentation technicians, plant equipment
operators, maintenance supervisors, and plant engineers.

The guide is primarily focused on using the Display application, the primary interface to the power
of the System 1 platform. The Display application is where you will spend most of your time; it is
used to retrieve and display both current and historical data in many different formats. This guide
shows you how to manage and display the large amount of information that is available to you and
how to maximize the benefit from your System 1 platform.

Layout of this User’s Guide

To get the most from your System 1 platform, it helps to understand something about the System
1 software architecture. Chapter 1 presents a structural, functional, and qualitative overview of
System 1 architecture, showing what the various software components of the System 1 platform do
and how they fit together.

Normally, once your System 1 platform is operational, data acquisition should not require any
intervention. Your System 1 Data Acquisition Application is normally configured to automatically
restart in the event of a power interruption. In the event that this feature has been disabled, Chapter
2 shows you how to get your data acquisition going again.
viii Introduction

Chapter 3 shows how to start the Display application and connect it to an Enterprise, the largest
organizational structure in your System 1 platform. This chapter also shows you how to verify that
your Display application is communicating properly with your data acquisition server computer.

The Display application is a powerful and flexible tool. Chapter 4 shows you how to understand
what you are seeing and how to customize your Display environment to meet your needs. This
chapter also describes the organizational structure of your Enterprise and the meaning and uses of
the various components in it.

The System 1 platform is designed to help you manage all your assets. Asset management requires
prompt notification when things go wrong. Your System 1 platform has extensive notification and
alarming capabilities, and the Display application has visual and audible cues that alert you to
important changes when they happen. Chapter 5 discusses these alarms and events: how to recog-
nize them, quickly locate the source of the problem, and obtain the information you need to take
action.

Data collection is an important part of System 1 functionality. The System 1 platform collects data
automatically from a wide variety of sources. System 1 also supports periodic data collection from
portable data collectors and manual data entry. Chapter 6 discusses how fast the System 1 platform
collects data and how you can download portable data collector Routes, upload data, and manual-
ly enter data.

Data must be displayed in a meaningful way to allow you to make informed decisions and take nec-
essary action. Chapter 7 teaches you how to access current and historical data and how to display
it in an appropriate plot format for rapid understanding.

Chapter 8 poses several common scenarios and provides recommendations on how to organize
information from various parts of your Enterprises. The material in this chapter draws from earli-
er chapters and shows you how to combine and use the techniques you have learned to effectively
manage your assets.

How to use this guide

We recommend that you read this guide from beginning to end. This is the best way to understand
how the System 1 platform works and to discover the many powerful features that are available.

If you need to find specific information, you can start at the Table of Contents at the beginning of
the guide or use the index at the back of the guide. Note that a small table of contents at the begin-
ning of each chapter lists all the section headings in that chapter and the page numbers where they
can be found. Inside each chapter, section headings appear at the top of the right page next to the
page number.
 Introduction ix

Special Warnings
Throughout this guide, you will see Application Alert warnings that look like this:

Application Alert: This message warns you that an inappropriate action on

your part may result in inaccurate signals, false alarms, missed alarms, or
cause some System 1 components to operate incorrectly or cause the data to
be inaccurate or misleading.

Whenever you encounter an Application Alert, be sure that you fully understand the consequences
of what you are about to do. If you have any questions or doubts on how to proceed, contact your
Bently Nevada service representative for advice.

Menu items
Windows menu items always appear in this font: Menu item/submenu item/lowest level menu
item... . The right slash (/) is used to indicate different levels in the menu structure. To access some
functions in the System 1 Display application, you will navigate through multiple menu levels.

Help application references

System 1 has an extensive Help application. It contains far more information than this guide. If you
would like more information on a particular topic, try looking in the Help application.

To access the Help application:

In the Display menu, select Help/Contents... . The Help application window

will appear with the Contents tab selected.

There are many places in this guide that direct you to the Help application for more information.
A Help application reference may appear in three different forms:

Help: Contents/Level 1/Level 2 etc. In this example, launch the Help applica-
tion, select the Contents tab, and then follow the hierarchy to the referenced topic.

Help: Index/Index topic. Launch the Help application, select the Index tab and
then enter the Index topic in the keyword field. The topic will appear in the list.
Select the topic to display it.

Help: Search/Search topic. Launch the Help application and select the Search
tab. Then enter the Search topic in the keyword field and press Enter or click on the
List Topics button. The topic will appear in the list. Select the topic to display it.
Chapter 1

What Is System 1™?

This chapter helps you get started by providing a brief overview of the System 1 software platform.
We will begin by describing the various elements of the platform, how they work, the purpose they
serve, and how they fit together. Because collecting and manipulating data is an important part of
System 1 operation, we will discuss the two types of System 1 databases and explain how the data
is accessed. We will conclude with a summary of the tools and extenders that can be used to man-
age and enhance the System 1 platform.

In this chapter

Topic Page
System 1 Overview 1
Data Acquisition 4
Databases 4
Configuration 8
Display 9
System 1 Tools 10
System 1 Extenders 11

System 1 Overview
System 1 software is a distributed, modular platform for managing machinery and plant assets. It
is distributed in the sense that the various elements of the platform can exist on widely separated
computers. These software elements can communicate with each other over a local area network
(LAN) or over a wide area network, Internet, or dial-up connection.

System 1 software allows you to combine data from many different sources into one common plat-
form so you can monitor the condition of more than just rotating and reciprocating machinery. The
software integrates with many condition monitoring technologies to provide information on all the
various production assets in your plant: valves, boilers, heat exchangers, and any other physical
equipment assets used in your process. Because of this integration, System 1 software allows you
2 Chapter 1: What Is System 1?

to view data from your process control system, plant historian, machinery control system, machin-
ery protection system, and portable walk around data collection devices.

System 1 software also allows data import and exchange with other platforms. The software can be
used to collect data, process it, and export results to other systems or software applications (pro-
grams). Data exported from System 1 can be further processed by external applications, and the
results can be imported back into System 1 for evaluation. System 1 can exchange information with
Computerized Maintenance Management Systems (CMMS), allowing it to display maintenance
histories for plant assets and generate automatic work requests. With System 1 software you can
examine and correlate virtually any kind of information associated with the operation of your plant,
from mechanical vibration data to plant process flows, maintenance planning, even the market
value of your finished product.

In the figure below, the boxes and arrows represent the sources and flow of data. Rotating and
reciprocating machinery data can be gathered by way of online critical machine monitoring sys-
tems, non-critical machine monitoring systems, and portable walk around programs. System 1 soft-
ware can also gather data from and exchange data with plant control systems and various
Computerized Maintenance Management Systems. System 1 software also exchanges data with
other software applications such as spreadsheets, where System 1 data can be further processed and
the results returned to System 1 for further analysis.

Plant
Process data control
3300, 3500
system Critical
online
monitoring machinery
systems

Maintenance Non critical

CMMS
data
system System 1 Trendmaster
2000 machinery

Snapshot Periodic
Portable Data walkaround
Software Collector program
applications

System 1™ is a software platform that integrates

information from a wide variety of sources.
 System 1 Overview 3

Finally, System 1 software is modular because it consists of several, independent software appli-
cations. The next figure shows a diagram of the principal elements of the System 1software plat-
form (the items inside the dashed box) and the most important data flow paths among them. The
three principal System 1 software applications are the Data Acquisition (DAQ) application, which
handles real-time data flow; the Configuration application, which is used to set up and modify your
System 1 installation; and the Display application, which is used to display information in many
different formats.

As shown in the figure, incoming data flows from a hardware or software source into an appropri-
ate Data Collector Module, which translates the data to a standard System 1 software format.
System 1 Data Acquisition receives this real-time data and sends it to Display and to the Historical
Database, where all database access is managed by Microsoft SQL Server. Data is sent to another
software application by way of a data exporter, which translates the outgoing data to the appropri-
ate format and protocol. It is possible to send data to an outside application (such as Microsoft
Excel) and import computation results back into System 1. The System 1 Configuration applica-
tion creates and stores the plant asset and instrumentation architecture in the Configuration
Database. This information is accessed by both DAQ and Display. The software platform can
reside on a single computer, or it can exist as a distributed system on several computers.

Incoming data Outgoing data

System 1 boundary
Data Data
Collector Exporter
Module

Data
Acquisition
(DAQ)
Principal System 1 software components
and data flow paths.
Real time
data
Display Config

Config
data
Historical
data
SQL Server

Historical Configuration
Database Database
4 Chapter 1: What Is System 1?

System 1 software also includes several smaller applications that either launch from within the
principal applications or act as special purpose, stand alone utilities. Additionally, several optional
System Extenders are available that further expand System 1 software capabilities. These will be
discussed later in this chapter.

Data Acquisition
The Data Acquisition application is the core of System 1. It must be installed on any computer that
is used for data acquisition (a DAQ computer). The Data Acquisition application is controlled by
the Data Acquisition Control Manager (DACM), which will be discussed in Chapter 2.

Each DAQ computer can collect data for only one Enterprise. An Enterprise is a complete
System 1 description of the assets of a business (the Enterprise) and includes plants, buildings,
machinery, instrumentation, all the way down to assets such as tank fluid levels and the value of
the fluid in those tanks. Even though a DAQ computer is dedicated to one Enterprise, an Enterprise
can have up to ten DAQ computers, each of which runs a Data Acquisition application.

Unless it has been disabled, DAQ runs continuously in the background. It collects data from many
different sources and sends real-time data to Display (the System 1 information display applica-
tion), the Historical Database, and to other applications via data exporters.

All data flows into DAQ and System 1 through Data Collector Modules (DCM). Each DCM is tai-
lored to a specific type of data source, and it serves as a data translator, converting source data into
a form that DAQ can understand. Data Collector Modules have been developed for several data
types (see the table on the facing page), and they allow data collection from both Bently Nevada
and non-Bently Nevada sources.

All data flows out of DAQ and System 1 by way of Data Exporters. Data exporters perform the
same function as Data Collector Modules in reverse: they act to translate System 1 data into a form
that other software applications can understand.

Databases
System 1 software has two types of databases. Often, the term database is used loosely to refer to
both databases.

The Configuration Database contains all the information about an Enterprise: the plant assets,
machines, monitors, DAQ computers, transducers, process variables, data sources from other sys-
tems, software (management) alarm settings, security information, etc. Your Configuration
Database will have the same name as your Enterprise with “_config” appended.
 Databases 5

System 1 Data Collector Modules (DCM)

DCM Uses

TDI Transient Data Interface. 3500 Monitor racks communicating

via TDI
TDXnet Transient Data External over network. 3300 and 3500
Monitor racks communicating via TDXnet
Snapshot Used to import data from Snapshot and handheld PC
Portable Data Collectors
NetDDE Used to import data from external applications supporting
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) or Network Dynamic Data
Exchange (NetDDE) protocol. Bently Manual Input commu-
nicates to System 1 through this protocol. Data from con-
trollers using the Modbus protocol can be imported to
System 1 through this DCM using the Process Correlation
Modbus Interface (PCMI) as an intermediary.
OPC OLE for Process Control. OPC is a robust specification for
communication between process control and condition
monitoring software products.

Note: this list is continuously expanding to include support for many other devices.

System 1 Data Exporters

Exporter Uses

DDE Exporter Primarily used to export data to Digital Control Systems,

Historians, and other software applications
OLE Automation Exporter Used primarily to export data to Microsoft Excel spread-
sheets acting as external calculation engines
OPC Exporter Used to export data to other process control or monitoring
applications
6 Chapter 1: What Is System 1?

A Historical Database contains data that has been previously collected by System 1. This database
can include a mixture of static data (gap voltage, filtered and direct vibration data, etc.) and dynam-
ic data (digitally sampled waveforms).

A sample of both types of database is included with every System 1 installation. This
demonstration database contains an example Enterprise configuration and a limited amount of his-
torical data. It is primarily used for test and verification after System 1 software installation. It can
also be used for learning: you can access the demonstration database, study how the various
Enterprise elements are organized, add and delete components from the Enterprise, and experiment
with plots.

Because System 1 is a distributed software platform, the Configuration Database, Historical

Database, and DAQ can all reside on separate computers. However, to enhance communication
speed and simplify installation, these three elements are usually installed on the same computer.

To access these databases, System 1 software uses the Microsoft SQL (Structured Query
Language) Server application. SQL Server must be installed on any computer that will contain any
System 1 database. It is supplied in two versions: an Embedded Edition and a Standard Edition.
The Embedded Edition limits the database to a maximum size of 2 GB. This can be adequate for
some portable data collection systems, but growth can cause database needs to exceed this limit.
SQL Server Standard Edition has no database size limits. Because online monitoring can generate
large amounts of data, SQL Server Standard Edition is required for these systems.

SQL is an open database language that allows users to access database information from outside
the System 1 environment by using the SQL query language. The external software package can
then distribute data to other locations and users.

Microsoft includes additional database management and access utilities with the SQL Standard
Edition; however, these utilities are not included with the Embedded Edition. To offset this limita-
tion, System 1 software provides an additional Database Tools utility for performing basic database
operations with either version.

The relationships between all the elements of a System 1 software installation can be quite com-
plicated. A very large installation can have multiple Enterprises, each of which can have multiple
DAQ computers accessing multiple Historical Databases and a Configuration database, and multi-
ple SQL Server database computers. As you might guess, there are rules about how a system must
be structured, but they really aren’t that complicated. For simplicity, we will assume that only one
Enterprise has been created, the usual case in practice. (For multiple Enterprises, the same rules
apply.)

An Enterprise can have from one to ten DAQ computers. For example, a large
Enterprise may have several areas, each with its own DAQ computer.
 Databases 7

Each DAQ computer must be assigned to its own, dedicated Historical Database
that serves its part of the Enterprise. There is always a one-to-one relationship
between a DAQ computer and a Historical Database.

Each Enterprise will have only one Configuration Database that contains all of
the configuration information for that Enterprise. Even if an Enterprise has mul-
tiple DAQs and Historical Databases, there will still be only one Configuration
Database for that Enterprise.

The Historical and Configuration Databases can reside on one or several data-
base server computers. Each of these must have SQL Server installed.

Notice that Historical and Configuration Databases are always associated with a particular
Enterprise. In spite of the potential complexity, for many Enterprises all of these different elements
of System 1 software can reside on a single computer. For more information, from within Display
see Help: Contents/Databases.

The figure shows System 1 software elements in an example Enterprise. This Enterprise consists
of a large plant divided into three areas, each of which has a DAQ with it’s associated Historical
Database (HDB). Also, each area has a copy of the Display Application so that data can be exam-
ined locally. The Configuration Application and the Configuration Database (CDB) for the whole
Enterprise is located in Area 1. In each plant, the various software elements can be installed on the
same computer, or they can all be installed on separate computers. The arrangement shown here
represents only one possibility of many.

Enterprise

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3

Data Data Data

Display DAQ 1 DAQ 2 DAQ 3

System 1 software elements in an example

Enterprise
Config HDB 1 HDB 2 HDB 3

CDB Display Display

Network
8 Chapter 1: What Is System 1?

Configuration
Think about your business. It may consist of several plants. Inside each plant are areas which divide
the plant into different functions. Inside each area may be many different buildings. The buildings
contain process machines, piping systems, and auxiliary machinery. Each machine train has one or
more drivers, couplings, and one or more driven machines. There is associated instrumentation
consisting of temperature, pressure, flow, position, and vibration transducers, each with its own
scale factor and full scale range. When your plant is operating, each transducer will have its own
unique set of values that constitute normal and abnormal behavior. In an online monitoring system,
these transducers are connected to many different types of monitors or other software applications
that communicate data to System 1. An Enterprise is a very complicated world.

To interpret incoming data, System 1 must have information about the structure of your Enterprise.
The Configuration application is used to define and organize these various elements: machine
types, monitor types, operating parameters, transducer types and scale factors, alarm levels, etc.
Configuration of an Enterprise is a very complex task, and System 1 software performance depends
on its accuracy. For this reason, it is usually performed by Bently Nevada service personnel during
installation of System 1.

Application Alert: You should approach all configuration changes with cau-
tion. When using Configuration, it is possible to make changes to your
Enterprise that could result in a loss of data or a failure to warn of problems
in a timely manner. If in doubt, contact your Bently Nevada service repre-
sentative.

After an Enterprise is created or modified in the Configuration application, the application stores
the Enterprise configuration in the Configuration Database. Besides the physical equipment and
instrumentation information, the Configuration Database also stores information about which DAQ
computers are used with the Enterprise and the location of the Historical Databases that are asso-
ciated with them. During the configuration process, System 1 computers are identified by their net-
work names. Thus, if someone changes one of the computer names outside of the System 1 soft-
ware, System 1 will not know about the change, and it will not be able to find the computer.

Application Alert: Do not change System 1 computer names outside the

Configuration application. Changing computer names will prevent the var-
ious System 1 software components from communicating with each other. It
is important for network administrators to be aware of this.

Security is important in your System 1 software installation. Unauthorized or inexperienced users

could gain access to data, modify the Enterprise configuration, or even destroy data. For these rea-
sons, you may wish to limit access to certain functions. The Configuration application is used to
set permissions on who can view information, edit and delete database information, acknowledge
 Display 9

and clear alarms, control data acquisition, and perform other functions. Security settings are unique
to each Enterprise; thus, different Enterprises can have different security settings.

Enterprise configuration changes can be performed while DAQ is active. When the new configu-
ration settings are saved to the database, a signal is sent to DAQ, telling it that a change has been
made. DAQ will then check the Configuration Database, update its information automatically, and
send a message to Display telling it that something has changed. Depending on the type and scope
of the configuration change, the update process may take several minutes to complete.

Display
The Display application is the primary user interface to System 1. Display receives and displays
real-time data from the various DAQs associated with an Enterprise, and it can be used to view data
from up to ten Enterprises simultaneously. Since each enterprise can have up to ten DAQ comput-
ers, this means that Display could receive and display data from up to 100 DAQs. Display can also
retrieve historical data. When viewing historical data, Display retrieves that data directly from a
Historical Database, bypassing DAQ.

For monitoring the condition of machinery, Display provides alarm and event reporting and has an
important component, the Event Manager, that is used to evaluate alarm and event status and his-
tory. (Alarms and events will be discussed in Chapter 5.) Display shows the current status of an
Enterprise and whether any components are in an alarm state.

For analysis, Display can present real-time and historical plant asset data using a large selection of
plots. It can display and plot any configurable data such as vibration levels, temperatures, pres-
sures, flows, Megawatts, operating efficiencies (when used with Bently Performance SE), fluid
levels, costs, even dollar value of inventory. System 1 software can obtain, and Display can pres-
ent, any value that can be measured by a transducer, sent from another software platform, entered
manually, or calculated from these values. Display can also link to various Computerized
Maintenance Management Systems, allowing access to an asset’s maintenance data.

If the Configuration application is installed on the same computer that is running Display, you can
view configuration properties for your Enterprise from inside the Display application.

Real-time data is pushed from DAQ to Display to avoid the need for data requests and their sub-
sequent delays. Because of this, a System 1 DAQ computer can transfer large amounts of data over
a dialup access line to Display. When many DAQ computers are connected to Display by a high
speed network, the volume of real-time data can become quite high. Display decides how fast it
can handle incoming data and can throttle the data as needed.

Because of its importance in daily operations, the use of Display will be the primary emphasis of
this manual. It will be discussed in detail in Chapters 4, 5, and 6.
10 Chapter 1: What Is System 1?

System 1 Tools
The principal System 1 software components are Data Acquisition, Configuration, and Display.
System 1 software also provides a number of utility programs that are used to manage different
aspects of the System 1 platform. These are accessed through the Windows Start Menu:
Start/Programs/Bently Nevada Corporation/System 1 Tools.

Bently Manual Input (BMI). This program allows you to manually enter data from the keyboard.
BMI can be used to enter any kind of data that is not collected as part of an online or portable data
collector system, for example, the gas composition analysis from a gas chromatography process,
or the weekly price of fuel that is used to calculate the Return on Investment for an electrical gen-
erating station. BMI is installed on, and must be run from, a Data Acquisition computer. BMI will
be discussed further in Chapter 6.

System 1 Database Tools. These utilities allow you to perform operations on configuration and his-
torical System 1 databases that have been created by either Embedded SQL or SQL Server
Standard Edition. These Tools allow you to attach or detach, register or unregister, backup or
restore, update, archive, and delete databases.

System 1 License Viewer. This utility allows you to check the status on your System 1 licenses.

System 1 Password. This utility allows you to change the administrative password on your System
1 computers.

TDXnet Initialization. The TDXnet Communications Processor (CP) collects and processes data
from 3300 and 3500 monitors and sends it to the System 1 DAQ computer. Each TDXnet CP in
your System 1 installation must be initialized before you can use it. The initialization process
includes defining the address of each CP, setting Keyphasor transducer parameters, establishing the
type of serial interface that will be used with the CP, and describing how the CP will communicate
with the System 1 DAQ computer. For more information, launch this utility
(Start/Programs/Bently Nevada Corporation/System 1 Tools/TDXnet Initialization) and
select Help: Contents... .

TDXnet Test Communication. This utility program tests the connectivity and communication
between a System 1 DAQ computer and any TDXnet Communication Processor it is connected to.
For more information, launch this utility (Start/Programs/Bently Nevada Corporation/System
1 Tools/TDXnet Test Communication) and select Help: Contents... .
 System 1 Extenders 11

System 1 Extenders
Additional applications have been developed to enhance the capabilities of the System 1 platform.
These System Extenders (SE) are separate products that are linked to one or more of the primary
components of a System 1 software installation. A detailed description of these extenders is beyond
the scope of this manual; they will be described briefly here. See the System 1 help application or
your System 1 Extender documentation for more information.

Bently Docuview SE allows you to link reference documents to any item in the Enterprise or
Instrumentation Hierarchies (these terms will be explained in Chapter 4). You can create links to
any accessible file, but to open it you must have the appropriate software application installed.
Such files might include engineering drawings, wiring diagrams, text documents, or spreadsheets.
Docuview links are available in both Configuration and Display.

Bently Performance SE provides online thermodynamic performance monitoring of machinery.

The System 1 DAQ computer obtains operating data from a machine, plant, and/or process control
system. It sends the data to Bently Performance, which calculates the machine performance param-
eters and sends the results back to DAQ. DAQ then trends, stores, and sends the results to Display,
where you can see performance information in both mechanical and thermodynamic data presen-
tations.

Decision Support SE automatically audits real-time data for machinery malfunctions. Sorting
through large amounts of data can be a tedious and time consuming process. Decision Support SE
does this for you. It consists of four modules:

The Decision Support Server can send notifications via e-mail, pager, or cell
phone for any event in System 1. It includes default actions and information for
most events that can occur. Typical notifications might include machinery pro-
tection alarms, management alarms, instrumentation problems, or changing con-
ditions on a specific machine train.

The Bently Steady State Knowledge Base is an expert system that diagnoses rotat-
ing machinery malfunctions using a sophisticated, rotordynamics-based rule set.
Steady state data is audited continuously, and the machine status is kept up to
date in System 1 just like any other software alarm. Detectable malfunctions
include misalignment, compressor surge, gear mesh problems, cavitation, ther-
mal problems, high vibration, rub, rotor bow, loose rotating parts, fluid-induced
instability, and more.

RuleDesk allows you to create new rules based on System 1 data. These rules are
combinations of logical and arithmetical operations that take any kind of data
(machinery or process) as an input and produce a value as an output. RuleDesk
operates in real time, and the results can be trended, alarmed on, or plotted. You
can use RuleDesk to fine tune the outputs from the Knowledge Base to create
sophisticated alarms for particular applications. Using RuleDesk and System 1’s
CMMS interface, Decision Support can be configured to automatically send
work requests to the CMMS system.

The Smart Notifier is a stand-alone, background “pop-up” event monitor that can
be installed on any personal computer. This module receives information from
the Decision Support Server, and it can be configured to notify you about only
those events that are of interest to you.
Chapter 2

Starting Data Acquisition

Normally, once your System 1 platform is operational, data acquisition should not require any
intervention. System 1 DAQ software runs as a service, and it is normally configured to automat-
ically start up without anyone having to log on. Thus, when power is restored after a power fail-
ure, your System 1 DAQ computers should automatically reboot, launch DAQ, and begin moving
data. Your database computers (if they are separate) should also automatically start and launch SQL
Server. You will have to manually restart Display to view your data.

In this chapter, we will show you how to manually start the critical System 1 data acquisition soft-
ware components in case the automatic start settings have been disabled. We will assume that
System 1 software has already been installed, configured, and tested, and that we are starting System
1 from a completely shutdown condition. We will briefly discuss System 1 security issues and show
how to verify that the SQL Server applications are running on database computers. Finally, we will
show how to start and initialize DAQ and verify that all System 1 modules are operating correctly.

In this chapter

Topic Page
Starting System 1 13
System 1 security and User Rights 15
Verifying that SQL Server is running 15
Quickly determining the status of a DAQ computer 16
The Data Acquisition Connection Manager 17
Launching the Data Acquisition Connection Manager 17
Starting data acquisition 18
Verifying that data modules are working properly 22

Starting System 1
The Data Acquisition application (DAQ) is the core of System 1 and must be connected to an
Enterprise and initialized (started) before you can perform tasks such as viewing, uploading, and
importing and exporting real-time data, or detecting alarms. For this data exchange to take place,
14 Chapter 2: Starting Data Acquisition

all database computers, SQL Server applications, and DAQ computers must be operating, and the
System 1 DAQ must be properly initialized.

As we discussed in Chapter 1, System 1 DAQ software and databases can be installed on many dif-
ferent, independent computers. Each DAQ retrieves its configuration information from the
Configuration Database for an Enterprise and sends real-time data to, and retrieves data from its
associated Historical Database.

Before you start System 1,

Understand your System 1 installation. Know which computers and monitoring

systems send data to System 1. Know which computers are used as database
computers, DAQ computers, Display computers, and Configuration computers.
These functions can be distributed over many computers, but many times the
entire System 1 installation will reside on one computer that serves all these pur-
poses. See Chapter 1 for a diagram of a possible installation.

Verify that you have the appropriate System 1 User Rights. To start data acquisi-
tion, you must be listed as a System 1 user and have the Data Acquisition Control
right. See the section on System 1 security and User Rights in this chapter.

System 1 startup follows the following sequence. This is an outline only; the details will be pre-
sented later.

Start all devices and applications that send data to the System 1 platform, includ-
ing monitoring systems and computers that act as information servers.

Start all computers that run System 1 software and log them into the network.
Normally, System 1 DAQ will automatically start as a service without the need
for anyone to log on to the DAQ computer. If DAQ has not automatically start-
ed, you will need to log on to either the DAQ computer or a computer where the
Data Acquisition Control Manager software is loaded.

Initiate data acquisition on each DAQ. Manually start data acquisition for any
DAQ in your Enterprise that is not already running.

Verify that all modules of each DAQ are running correctly. Depending on the com-
plexity of your hardware and software, many Data Collector Modules, Importers,
Exporters, and external computers can be moving data in and out of your System 1 plat-
form. Each hardware and software element should be checked for proper operation.

Start Display after DAQ is running correctly.

 System 1 security and User Rights 15

Except for Display, we will now discuss how to perform startup tasks in detail. Starting Display
will be discussed in Chapter 3.

System 1 security and User Rights

User rights are a set of permissions that allow a user to perform specific tasks in System 1. These
tasks can range from something as simple and safe as viewing data to something as potentially
destructive as deleting data. Because each Enterprise can have different user rights assigned to
each user, access to one Enterprise does not guarantee access to all Enterprises.

To access information stored in System 1, the System 1 Administrator must add you as a user in the
System 1 Security Manager. As a System 1 user, by default you will be allowed to view all the
information that is available in Display, including real-time and historical data, alarms, and con-
figuration information (if Configure is installed on the same computer as Display). You can also be
given additional user rights, depending on your needs and responsibilities. System 1 Administrators
automatically have all user rights. See the Appendix for more information on System 1 User Rights
and the Security Manager.

Before you can start System 1 data acquisition for an Enterprise, the System 1 Administrator must
add you as a System 1 user for that Enterprise and give you the System 1 Data Acquisition Control
user right for that Enterprise. You cannot start or stop data acquisition without this right.

Windows
Verifying that SQL Server is running System
Each database computer will have an SQL Running Tray

Server application installed. By default, SQL SQL Server status

Server will automatically launch when the data-

base computer starts. If the autostart feature has
been disabled or if SQL Server fails to start, Computer name Paused
System 1 DAQ will attempt to launch SQL
Server when DAQ initializes. Thus, you will not
normally have to start SQL Server manually.
Stopped

To verify that SQL Server is running:

1. Go to the database server computer.

2. Look in the Windows System Tray. The SQL Server icons in the
SQL icon looks like a small computer Windows System Tray
and indicates whether SQL is running,
paused, or stopped.
16 Chapter 2: Starting Data Acquisition

3. Position your mouse pointer over the

tray icon. A message will appear stat-
ing the status of SQL Server. Press
to start

To start an SQL Server that is not running:

1. Double click the SQL icon in the

Windows System Tray. The SQL
Server Service Manager window will Check

appear.

2. Click Start/Continue. SQL Server dialog box. Click the

Start/Continue button to run SQL
3. Be sure the Auto-start service when Server. Checking the “Auto-start
OS starts box is checked. This option service when OS starts” box will
causes the SQL Server to start auto- automatically load and run SQL
matically whenever this database Server when the computer starts.
computer starts.

Quickly determining the status of a DAQ computer

On a DAQ computer, the Windows System Tray will have a DAQ icon that looks like the System
1 logo. As the table below shows, this icon can show several changes, depending on the current sta-
tus of DAQ. You can also move your mouse pointer over the DAQ icon in the tray, and a text mes-
sage will appear showing the current DAQ status.

The status of a DAQ computer can also be verified using the Data Acquisition Connection
Manager.

Windows System Tray

DAQ Status
Data Acquisition icons in the
Windows System Tray of a
DAQ computer

Icon Meaning
Green right-pointing arrowhead DAQ running
Downward-pointing red arrow DAQ is stopping
Red X DAQ is not running
Upward-pointing arrow with yellow arrowhead DAQ is starting
 The Data Acquisition Connection Manager 17

The Data Acquisition Connection Manager

The Data Acquisition Connection Manager (DACM) is used to control one or more System 1 Data
Acquisition applications (DAQ). The DACM is often installed on a DAQ computer, but it can also
be installed on any System 1 computer where it might be useful. To control your DAQs, you must
have an active link between the computer running the DACM and each DAQ computer in your sys-
tem.

The DACM is used for three purposes:

1. To Connect a DAQ to an Enterprise. During the connection process, you tell the
DAQ which Enterprise it will manage data for and which database server com-
puter contains the Configuration Database for that Enterprise. Connection is nor-
mally performed as part of the installation and testing of your System 1 platform.
Once a DAQ has been connected to an Enterprise, it should automatically recon-
nect the next time the DAQ computer is started. See the System 1 Software
Installation Quick Start Guide, Bently Nevada part number 144323-01, for infor-
mation on how to connect a DAQ to an Enterprise.

2. To start (initialize) or stop data acquisition. During this process, DAQ looks in
the Configuration Database for information on the Enterprise, including instru-
mentation, various sources of data, data export information, alarming informa-
tion, and the location of its Historical Database server. Using that information,
DAQ starts collecting and moving real-time data.

3. To verify DAQ status and that the various data import and export modules of
your System 1 installation are operating properly.

Launching the Data Acquisition Connection Manager

To start the Data Acquisition Connection Manager, you must go to a computer where the DACM
is installed. You can start the DACM three different ways:

From the Windows Start Menu, select Start/Programs/Bently Nevada/System

1 Data Acquisition.

In the Windows System Tray, double click on the System 1 Data Acquisition icon.

In the Windows System Tray, right click on the System 1 Data Acquisition icon
and select Open DAQ Connection Manager.

The DACM will launch in a new window.

18 Chapter 2: Starting Data Acquisition

Starting data acquisition

When the DACM opens, you will see a two panel window:

Colors
indicate
status

DAQ computer names

The Data Acquisition Connection Manager window

In the left panel, the highest level of the hierar- DAQ icons
chy is Data Acquisition Servers. In this exam-
ple, two DAQ computers are listed under this Red
Not Running
level: HATCH_CHARLIE, and SYS1TEST-A.
The right panel shows the status of these com-
puters. SYS1TEST-A is “Running” and Initializing
HATCH_CHARLIE is “Not running.” A green
Green
dot on the computer icon means that DAQ is Running
running; a red dot means that DAQ is not run-
ning. The term running means that the System 1
Update in progress
Data Acquisition software has been initialized
and is able to move data; it does not refer to the
status of the DAQ computer itself. Many other Configuring
DAQ icons can appear; see the figure here. See
also Help: Index/Data Acquisition Closing
Connection Manager, Status.
 Starting data acquisition 19

You can start (initiate) data acquisition on your DAQ computer three ways:

Select the DAQ computer you wish to start, then click on the Initiate DAQ icon.

Initiate DAQ

Initiating DAQ using the icon

Or, select the DAQ computer you wish to start, then go to the menu at the top of
the window and select DAQ/Initiate DAQ.

Initiating DAQ using the main menu

20 Chapter 2: Starting Data Acquisition

Or, right click the DAQ computer you wish to start, then select Initiate DAQ.

Right click on
DAQ computer
icon

Initiating DAQ using the right click menu

When you initiate DAQ, the computer icon in the DACM window will change, showing that data
acquisition is starting. At the same time, the DACM Windows System Tray icon will change to an
upward pointing, yellow-tipped arrow.

Depending on the size of the Enterprise, DAQ can take up to several minutes to initialize and start
running. Be patient. During this initialization period, the mouse pointer will NOT change to an
hourglass; this allows you to perform other tasks in DACM during initialization. When the DAQ
is fully operational, the dot on the DAQ computer icon in the DACM window will turn green, and
the system tray icon will show a green arrow.

After initializing DAQ, verify that the DAQ application is configured to automatically restart in the
event of a computer reboot.

To configure DAQ for automatic restart,

1. In the DACM window, right click on

the DAQ computer icon and select
Properties.

Accessing the properties of a DAQ server

 Starting data acquisition 21

2. In the DAQ properties window click on the DAQ Service tab.

Accessing the DAQ Service setting

3. Set DAQ Service Startup Mode to Automatic and click OK. The next time this
DAQ computer reboots, System 1 DAQ will automatically start and begin mov-
ing data.

Setting DAQ for automatic startup

22 Chapter 2: Starting Data Acquisition

Verifying that data modules are working properly

Once data acquisition is started, go to the DACM window and select a DAQ computer in the left
panel. The right panel lists the various Data Collector Modules and any other software modules
associated with the selected DAQ and their status.

This computer
selected

Modules
More information
running under
under this level
SYSTEST-A
listed here

Verifying the status of modules running under the control of a DAQ computer

In this example, SYS1TEST-A has been selected. The right panel lists the modules running under
this computer. The modules are listed by name with their status, type, and software version num-
ber. In this example, all of these modules have a status of “Running,” indicating that all these mod-
ules are operating normally.

The icons that appear in the right panel represent differ-

ent kinds of data sources available to this System 1 soft-
ware platform. The figure at right lists some of the icons
you may see. For more information, see Help:
DACM module icons
Index/Data Acquisition Connection Manager, Icons.
Data Collector Module
In the example above, the DAQ computer named
SYS1TEST-A is moving data for its Enterprise. Software module
SYS1TEST-A has several modules operating under its
control. From top to bottom, all the modules are running: Data Exporter
the 3500 TDI Data Collector Module (DCM), the
Actionable Information Server, the DDE Exporter;
Decision Support; the NetDDE DCM; the OLE
Automation Exporter; the Snapshot Portable Data
Collector DCM, and the TDXnet DCM. Decision sup-
 Verifying that data modules are working properly 23

port is running the Custom Rule Processor and the Bently Knowledge Base (shown as the Steady
State Knowledge Base).

In the left panel, immediately to the left of each DAQ computer icon is a “+” sign indicating that
more sublevels exist in the DAQ hierarchy. If you click on the +, sublevels will expand so you can
check the status of all sublevel modules (see below). You can move your mouse over the various
devices in the DAQ hierarchy, and a text message will appear showing the status of that device.

In the DAQ hierarchy, each node represents a module or component of System, and the structure
of the hierarchy indicates the path of the data through the System 1 platform. In the left panel, the
status of each of these elements is indicated by the color of the dot at each level. Any color other
than green should be investigated. You can display more information about each node by holding
the mouse over the node to display a status message or by selecting a node to display information
about that node in the right panel of the dialog.

In this example, the NetDDE DCM was selected earlier and is highlighted (inverse text). The right
panel shows that the computer named SYS1TEST-A is communicating with the NetDDE DCM.
This Enterprise is collecting data from a software application that is running on SYS1TEST-A. (For
example, this could be a spreadsheet supplying the result of a calculation.) The data is imported
into the System 1 software platform by way of the NetDDE DCM. In this example, SYS1TEST-A

Contents of next level under selected item at left

Previously selected item

This item shows color indicating a problem here

Mouse pointer over problem item

displays nature of problem

Verifying the status of sub modules

is acting both as a System 1 DAQ and as a DDE server at the same time (in this case, the comput-
er named SYS1TEST-A is running a separate software application that is sending data to the
System 1 DAQ, which also happens to be running on SYS1TEST-A).

Sys1DQ$ is a DDE share name, a name that the DDE server computer (in this case, also
SYS1TEST-A), uses to identify a particular software application that is sending data to System 1.
A mouse rollover tag has appeared indicating that this share is “Partially Communicating,” a sig-
nal that something is wrong. In this case, the message means that some DDE items in that appli-
cation are not sending data.

In your Enterprise, you may have different modules than those shown in these figures. When you
verify your own System 1 software installation, fully expand your DACM hierarchy in the left
panel and check for green on all your modules. Any other color indicates a potential problem; if
you cannot resolve the problem, contact your Bently Nevada service representative for help.

If a problem occurs with one of your data handling modules during normal operation, an Event will
be generated that will be visible in Display. We will discuss Events in Chapter 5.
Chapter 3

Starting Display

The Display application is the primary user interface for your System 1 software platform. You can
use it to view, analyze, and print any data that is coming into the platform. You can display the cur-
rent values of any measured parameter and detect events and alarms. You can also use Display to
view historical data; in this case, Display bypasses DAQ and retrieves data directly from a histor-
ical database. Display can be used to present data from up to ten Enterprises simultaneously.
Display can also be used to perform some basic platform configuration tasks, such as renaming or
adjusting alarm setpoints.

Display does not start automatically; it must be started manually like most Windows applications.
Display must then be connected manually to each Enterprise you wish to view. In this chapter you
will learn how to start Display and connect it to an Enterprise. Later chapters will discuss the fea-
tures and operation of Display.

In this chapter

Topic Page
Before starting Display 25
Starting Display 26
Connecting to an Enterprise 26
Connecting to an Enterprise the easy way: Quick Connect 26
Connecting using the Display menu 28
How to connect to an Enterprise the first time 30
How to configure an Enterprise for Quick Connect 34
Disabling Quick Connect 37
Verifying that Display is receiving data 37

Before starting Display

Before you can access an Enterprise from the Display application, you must be added to the System
1 User List for the Enterprise you wish to view. This must be done by your System 1 Administrator
in the System 1 Configuration application. Each Enterprise has a separate set of user rights, and
26 Chapter 3: Starting Display

you must be added to each Enterprise’s User List separately. See the Appendix for more informa-
tion.

To view real-time data, view alarms, or to utilize Decision Support or Bently Performance, the
appropriate data acquisition computers (DAQs) associated with the Enterprises you wish to view
must be running. You can verify DAQ operation using the Data Acquisition Control Manager (see
Chapter 2). Note that you can connect to an Enterprise and view historical data even if System 1
DAQs are not running for the selected Enterprise. Even if you only wish to view historical data,
you must be on the System 1 User List for that Enterprise.

Starting Display
Click the Start button and select Start/Programs/Bently Nevada/System 1 Display. Display
will launch with an empty window. At this point, Display is running, but it is not receiving and can-
not access any data. It must first be connected to an Enterprise.

Connecting to an Enterprise
In System 1 Display you can view data from one to up to ten Enterprises simultaneously.
Connecting involves telling Display where the Enterprise databases are located and how they will
communicate with Display. Display saves the connection information in a special file that is stored
on your Display workstation. Display can use that information to quickly connect to the Enterprise
the next time.

Before you connect Display to an Enterprise, the various Enterprise components must have been
defined during the configuration process, and the Data Acquisition Connection Manager must have
been used to associate one or more DAQ computers with the Enterprise (see Chapter 2). During
your System 1 software installation, these tasks should have been performed for you.

From Display, see Help: Contents/Display/Connecting to an Enterprise for more information

on the connection process.

Connecting to an Enterprise the easy way: Quick Connect

Display has a Quick Connect feature that makes connecting to your Enterprises as easy as pushing
one button. To use this feature, your Display software must already be configured for Quick
Connect.

To connect to an Enterprise using Quick Connect:

Press the Quick Connect icon located at the upper left of your Display screen.
 Connecting to an Enterprise the easy way: Quick Connect 27

Display window

Connecting to an Enterprise using the Quick Connect feature

Display will attempt to connect to each Enterprise that is configured for Quick Connect. This
process may take some time. Display must retrieve configuration information from the
Configuration Database for each Enterprise and then attempt to connect to all DAQ computers for
these Enterprises.

Possible error messages:

“There are no Enterprises enabled for quick connect or all Enterprises that are
configured for quick connect are already connected.” If you have just started
Display, then the first part of this message applies. You have no Enterprises con-
figured for Quick Connect. Click OK and go to the next section to learn how to
connect to your Enterprises another way, and see the section on configuring
Quick Connect later in this chapter. The second part of the message applies if you
have already connected to your Enterprises and accidentally hit the Quick
Connect button again.

“Error communicating with database. Make sure that the logged-on user has
permissions to connect to the selected Enterprise database, and that the selected
SQL server is on the network.” This error message can occur for two reasons:
28 Chapter 3: Starting Display

First, you are not on the System 1 User List for any Enterprise you wish to view.
Second, Display cannot find the Configuration database for an Enterprise. There
could be a network connection problem, the Configuration Database server could
be down, or SQL Server may not be running on the Configuration Database serv-
er (see Chapter 2).

Connecting using the Display menu

Use the Enterprise menu in Display if Quick Connect is not configured or if you want to connect
to a different Enterprise. The following assumes that the System 1 Database and DAQ computers
are all running (see Chapter 2).

To connect to an Enterprise:

Connecting to an Enterprise using the menu

1. In Display, select Enterprise/Open/Enterprise...

The Enterprise Connect window will appear. This window contains a list of
Enterprises that have previously been configured in Display for connection. (If
no servers appear in the list or if the Enterprise Name you wish to connect to does
not appear, go to the next section below.)
 Connecting using the Display menu 29

2. Left click to select the Enterprise Name you want. Then press the Connect icon
above the server list or the Connect button at the bottom of the Connect window.

Enterprise
Computer containing name
Configuration Database
for Enterprise

Select the Enterprise and click on the Connect icon.

The small server icon will change, showing that the connection process has
begun.

After the connection process is complete, and depending on how the Display window was last
arranged, the Display window will show the view and hierarchies of the Enterprises.
30 Chapter 3: Starting Display

How to connect to an Enterprise the first time

You may wish to connect to an Enterprise that is not listed in the Enterprise Connect window. To
connect to an Enterprise the first time:

1. In the Enterprise Connect Window, click on the Add icon or, in the menu, select
Enterprise/Add.

Click on the Add icon to add another Enterprise to the list.

The Properties window will appear.

Network or Dial-up
connection

Computer storing
Configuration Database

Enterprise you wish

Check to allow fast
to connect to
reconnect next time

The Enterprise Properties window

 How to connect to an Enterprise the first time 31

2. Select your connection type:

If you are connecting over a local or wide area network, select LAN.

If you are using a dial-up connection, select Dial-up; then, in the Dial-up prop-
erties, enter the phone number. Be sure to include any extra numbers you may
need to reach an outside line, and the country and area codes if appropriate.

3. Use the drop down list to find an SQL Server computer on your domain.

You must identify the name of the SQL Server computer that contains the
Configuration Database for the Enterprise you are interested in, and you must be
on the System 1 User List for that Enterprise. If the computer is located on anoth-
er domain, you may have to manually type in the name of that computer. In the
figure, the computer SYS1TEST-A has been selected. The list to the right shows
the Enterprises that have been associated with that computer. (It is likely that
your list will show only one Enterprise associated with an SQL Server
Configuration Database computer.)

4. Select the Enterprise you wish to connect to. In this example, the Enterprise
Name is Walrus.

5. If you do not need to log in to a remote or different account, leave the

Impersonate box unchecked, and go to step 6.

If you will need to log in to a remote account, you may wish to check the
Impersonate box. Checking Impersonate allows your copy of Display to com-
municate with a remote Enterprise using the same local account used by the
remote Enterprise, even though you are logged on to your computer with your
own NT/2000 domain account. Normally, in order to gain access to an Enterprise
on a remote system, you would have to log off your computer and log in under
the remote account. This would cause you to lose your local account e-mail and
profile settings. The impersonate feature allows you to gather data from the
remote Enterprise while remaining logged in to your local account and retaining
your local e-mail service and profile.

Impersonation requires that several special conditions must be met, including

some advanced user rights that must be set in the computer doing the imperson-
ation. Before attempting to activate impersonation, see the readme file,
DSReadme.txt, which is located in your System 1 program directory.
32 Chapter 3: Starting Display

When you check the Impersonate box, the Impersonate A User dialog box
appears.

Enter remote
account name

Password for
remote account

Enter remote
domain name

Configuring User Impersonation

Enter the remote account name, the remote account password, and the remote
domain name, and click OK. You will return to the Properties window.

6. Check the Enable Quick Connect box if you wish to use Quick Connect next time
to connect to this Enterprise.

If you do not want to use Quick Connect with this Enterprise, leave this box
unchecked.
 How to connect to an Enterprise the first time 33

7. Click OK. The Enterprise Connect window reappears.

Lightning bolt indicates this Enterprise

is enabled for Quick Connect

Enterprise Connect window after adding a new Enterprise

The new Enterprise has been added to the list. This list will be saved in a local
file on your Display workstation so that it will be available next time. In this
example, Enterprise Walrus has been configured for Quick Connect; it shows a
yellow lightning bolt across the computer icon.

8. Click on the Connect button to connect to this Enterprise.

34 Chapter 3: Starting Display

How to configure an Enterprise for Quick Connect

You can configure up to ten Enterprises for Quick Connect any time you are running Display. Once
you have done this, the next time you start Display you will be able to connect to those Enterprises
simply by pressing the Quick Connect button. Quick Connect also works for remote, dial-up sys-
tems.

To configure Quick Connect:

1. In Display, select Enterprise/Open/Enterprise... The Enterprise Connect win-

dow will appear.

No lightning bolts
No Quick Connect
Display is connected to
Enterprise named
DemoVersion21

Determining whether an Enterprise is configured for Quick Connect

In this example, the double computer icon shows that Display is already con-
nected to the Enterprise named DemoVersion21. Another Enterprise named
Walrus is listed, but there is no connection to it. No lightning bolt icon appears
over either Enterprise computer icon; thus, neither Enterprise is configured for
Quick Connect.
 How to configure an Enterprise for Quick Connect 35

2. Right click on the Enterprise you wish to configure for Quick Connect and select
Properties. The Properties window will appear.

Enterprise name

Check to Enable Quick Connect

Configuring an Enterprise for Quick Connect

In this example, DemoVersion21 was selected, and it appears under the

Enterprise Name.
36 Chapter 3: Starting Display

3. Check the Enable Quick Connect box, and click OK.

Lightning bolt shows

Enterprise DemoVersion21
is now configured for Quick Connect

The Enterprise is now configured for Quick Connect.

The Enterprise Connect window reappears with a lightning bolt icon over the
Enterprise. This indicates that this Enterprise is now configured for Quick
Connect.

4. Repeat this procedure for any other Enterprises in the list. If we right click on
Enterprise Walrus, and repeat step 2, both Enterprises will show the lightning
bolt icon. In this example, Display is currently connected to only one Enterprise.
Press Exit to finish, or press Connect to also connect to Enterprise Walrus.

Lightning bolts show that both Enterprises

are now configured for Quick Connect

Both Enterprises are now configured for Quick Connect.

The next time you start Display, click on the Quick Connect icon to connect to all the Enterprises
you have configured for Quick Connect.
 Disabling Quick Connect 37

Disabling Quick Connect

You can disable the Quick Connect feature for any Enterprise.

To disable Quick Connect:

1. In Display, select Enterprise/Open/Enterprise... The Enterprise Connect win-

dow will appear.

2. Right click on the Enterprise you wish to disable for Quick Connect and select
Properties. The Properties window will appear.

3. Uncheck the Enable Quick Connect box, and click OK.

Verifying that Display is receiving data

After connecting to an Enterprise and reading the configuration information, Display will attempt
to contact the DAQs for that Enterprise to obtain real-time data. It is important to verify that
Display is communicating with its DAQs; otherwise, alarm notifications will not occur and you
will not be able to view real-time data.

There are three ways you can verify that the DAQs in an Enterprise are communicating (see the
figure on the next page):

1. The hierarchy icons in Display will have colors associated with their alarm or
event status. If DAQs are not communicating, the icons will show a white
background.

2. A colored dot will appear next to the Enterprise name in the View at the top
of the Display window. If DAQs are not communicating, no dot will appear.

3. A message will appear at the bottom right of the Display window saying
“DAQ Communicating.” If any DAQ is not communicating, the message will
read, “DAQ Not Communicating.”

If an Enterprise has multiple DAQs and only some are communicating, then the displayed status
of each part of the Enterprise will depend on the status of its DAQ. Similarly, if multiple
Enterprises are being displayed, then the displayed status of the Enterprise (or part thereof) will
depend on the status of the DAQs for that Enterprise. The status indications will depend on which
Enterprise or which node in an Enterprise you have selected. In other words, the status indications
display the status of the currently selected node.

If a DAQ is not communicating, see Chapter 2 on how to initialize your DAQs.

 Colored dot
indicates DAQ is
communicating
Display Window

No dot indicates DAQ is

NOT communicating

Colored backgrounds
indicate DAQ is
communicating

No color in backgrounds
indicates DAQ is
NOT communicating
DAQ messages

Verifying DAQ communication with Display

Chapter 4

A Guided Tour
of the Display Environment

In Chapter 3 you learned how to launch Display and connect to an Enterprise. In this chapter we
will show you how to navigate in and control your Display environment. We will also discuss the
meaning and use of the two primary organizational structures in Display: the Enterprise and
Instrument Hierarchies.

In this chapter

Topic Page
Introduction 40
The Display window 40
Hierarchies and Views 40
Controlling the visibility of Toolbars 44
Customizing toolbars 45
Creating a custom menu item and toolbar 45
Linking applications to Enterprise components 48
Layouts and the View menu 50
Groups, Areas, Plants, and Buildings 50
Machine trains and machine components 52
Custom Assets 53
Examining the properties of objects in the hierarchy 53
Points and Variables 55
Types of Points 58
Orphaned Points 59
The Instrument Hierarchy 60
Setting Hierarchy Filters 62
Deleting Hierarchy Filters 64
Routes 64
Associations 65
Collection Groups 66
Plot and Bargraph Session Managers 68
40 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

Introduction
The System 1 Display application provides two primary functions:

1. Data notification functions such as alarm and event recording and reporting,
archiving of data, establishing Enterprise connections, adding or editing journal
entries for specific components, and several other functions.

2. Data presentation functions such as plotting, lists, graphs, Collection Groups,

Plot Sessions, and other presentation devices.

Enterprises and the levels of organization contained in the Enterprises can be created and changed
only in the System 1 Configuration application. Enterprises usually include several different levels
of organization in order to best represent the machinery and other interfaces needed to observe your
operation. You use a variety of menus and icons in the Display application to control how the
organization of the Enterprise is displayed and how data is presented.

The Display window

Once connected to your Enterprise, the Display window will present several perspectives on your
Enterprise.

The figure on the opposite page shows the default layout of the Display window. The three white
panes show the Enterprise, Instrument, and in this example, the Plot Session hierarchies. Note that
the currently selected nodes have highlighted names. The two black panes near the top of the win-
dow show the Enterprise and Instrument Views. Enterprise and Instrument hierarchies and views
will be discussed in the next section.

Two important message areas at the bottom of the window are the current default data range and
the DAQ communication status. The default data range defines a span of time that will be used for
presentation of data; it will be discussed in Chapter 7. See Chapter 3 for information on the DAQ
communication status.

Hierarchies and Views

An Enterprise is a complete System 1 software description of the assets of a business (an
Enterprise) and includes plants, buildings, machinery, all the way down to assets such as storage
tanks. When you connect to an Enterprise, the Display window will present different kinds of infor-
mation in several panes.

A hierarchy is a nested, tree-type presentation of the organizational structure of an Enterprise. The

Display application presents two primary types of hierarchies, the Enterprise Hierarchy, and the
Instrument Hierarchy.
 Hierarchies and Views 41

Standard toolbar Plots toolbar

Navigation toolbar

Menu bar
Enterprise
Control
toolbar Current Instrument node

Enterprise Instrument
Currently View View
selected
Enterprise
node

Enterprise
Hierarchy

Full Enterprise Filtered Enterprise

Hierarchy tab Hierarchy tab
Plot Session
Manager display

Currently
Instrument
selected
Hierarchy
Instrument
node

Full Instrument Filtered Instrument Collection Bargraph

Hierarchy tab Hierarchy tab Group tab Session tab

Default data range DAQ communication status

The Display window default layout

42 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

The Enterprise Hierarchy displays the organization of the physical elements of your Enterprise.
This hierarchy is usually organized around the physical layout of the various parts of the
Enterprise. In the Enterprise Hierarchy, individual plant assets can appear in more than one part of
the tree. For example, a boiler feed pump may be listed in a power plant area, and it may also
appear in a group containing all boiler feed pumps.

The Instrument Hierarchy displays the organization of the instrumentation of your Enterprise. The
structure of this hierarchy reflects the actual signal flow path through your instrumentation system.
In the Instrument Hierarchy, a particular component, such as a transducer, monitor channel, or
computer will only appear in one place in the hierarchy.

In a hierarchy, the level of visible detail can be controlled by clicking on the “+” and “–” symbols
at each node. A node (also called a component) is a level in a hierarchy. Nodes with a “+” or “–”
symbol at the left have sublevels. Clicking on a “+” will show the sublevels under that node, click-
ing “–” will collapse the sublevels under that node.

You can select a node by clicking on the name or icon associated with a node. Expansion and col-
lapse of trees is independent from node selection. If you select a node and expand another part of
the Enterprise Hierarchy, the original selection will remain.

A View displays a graphic representation of a physical or instrumentation asset. This can be an actu-
al photograph of a plant or machine train, or it can be an image produced by the System 1 appli-
cation software. A View always shows the assets that exist at the next lower level below the cur-
rently selected hierarchy node.

For example, in the figure on the previous page, the currently selected Enterprise Hierarchy node
is DemoVersion2 (the top level for this enterprise), and the Enterprise view displays a picture of the
Rutherford Plant, the next lower node in this enterprise. The currently selected Instrument node is
Instruments - DemoVersion2, and the Instrument view displays an image of a data acquisition com-
puter named Demo Data Acquisition Server, the DAQ at the next lower level in the Instrument
Hierarchy.

Another example is shown on the opposite page: the Enterprise Hierarchy in the previous figure
has been expanded to the Ethylene Building level. The Enterprise Hierarchy shows two nodes
below the building, an Ethylene Compressor Train and an Oil Lubrication Pump. These two
machine trains are displayed in the Enterprise View above. Think about it this way: the View dis-
plays what you might see if you were standing inside the selected node, in this case, the Ethylene
Building. This holds true down to the machine train level. Below that level, the machine train is
always displayed in the View. The Instrumentation View works in a similar way.
 Hierarchies and Views 43

Enterprise View shows

contents of level
below selected node

Selected node in
Enterprise Hierarchy

The relationship of the Enterprise View to the Enterprise Hierarchy

44 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

Controlling the visibility of Toolbars

Toolbars let you quickly access Display functions. If you hold the mouse pointer over any icon in
a toolbar, a tooltip will appear (unless this feature has been disabled) that describes its function. By
activating, removing, and positioning toolbars, you can customize the Display interface to help you
work efficiently.

To control the visibility and position of toolbars:

1. Select Tools/Customize... or View/Toolbars/Customize... . The Customize

dialog box will appear.

2. Click on the Toolbars tab.

Controlling the visibility of toolbars

3. Check or clear any box to control the visibility of specific toolbars.

4. Drag the toolbars to any position in the Display window and dock them, or leave
them undocked if you wish.
 Customizing toolbars 45

5. Use the following controls the customize the operation and appearance of the
toolbar:

Control Description
Show Tooltips Cause a text description (the tooltip) to appear over
an icon when you position the mouse cursor over it
Cool Look Change the appearance of the toolbars
Large Buttons Make the toolbar icons larger

6. Click OK to finalize your changes.

Customizing toolbars
Display allows you to customize toolbars. See also
Help: Contents/Display Features and Navigation/Display Screens/Customize Tool.

To customize toolbars:

1. Select Tools/Customize... or View/Toolbars/Customize... . The Customize

window will appear.

2. Click on the Command tab. A list of Display command categories will appear.

3. Select a Category. Icon buttons associated with those commands will appear at
right.

4. Drag a button to any toolbar in the Display window. The new button will be
added to the toolbar.

5. Remove any unwanted buttons by dragging them off the toolbar.

6. Click OK to close the Customize window.

Creating a custom menu item and toolbar

You can create a custom menu item and toolbar icon that will allow you to launch other applica-
tions by simply clicking on an icon in Display. For example, you can create a button and menu item
that will launch a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
46 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

To create a custom menu item and toolbar icon:

1. Select Tools/Customize... . The Customize window will appear.

2. Click on the Tools tab. A list of existing custom menu items will be displayed.

3. Click the Add button to create a new entry.

Press Add to create

a new menu item

Use buttons to
browse for files

Text that will appear as a menu item

Full path of Windows command that launches application

(optional) Path of document you want to open, use quotes

(optional) Initial working directory

4. In the Menu Text box, enter the text that you want to appear as a menu item in
the Tools drop down menu.

5. Define the Windows command that will launch the application. Click on the but-
ton to the right of the Command field. The Select Program window will appear.

6. Browse for the application’s executable file and select it. The full path will
appear in the Command field.

7. To automatically open a file when the application launches, enter the full path
and filename in the Arguments field. Important: if any spaces appear in the
path or filename, enclose the full path and filename in quotes. To launch the
application without opening a file, you can leave this field blank.

8. To control the working directory of the application, enter the path of the folder
in the Initial Directory field or browse for a directory using the button at right.

9. Click OK to close the Customize window.

 Customizing toolbars 47

The new menu item will appear at the bottom of the Tools menu in the Display window. If it is
available to the operating system, an application icon will be automatically displayed next to your
menu text. Click on the menu item to launch your application.

Custom
menu item

Custom menu item in Tools menu

The menu item you created is also automatically added to a custom toolbar.

To activate the custom toolbar, go to the Menu and select View/Toolbars and select the Tools tool-
bar. You can also activate the custom toolbar through the Tools menu:

1. Select Tools/Customize... . The Customize window will appear.

2. In the Toolbars list, check the box next to Tools. The Tools toolbar will appear.

3. Click OK to close the Customize Tools toolbar

window.

The toolbar will remain. If you wish, you

can dock it in the Display window. Click on
the icon in the toolbar to launch your cus- Newly added custom menu item

tom application.
48 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

Linking applications to Enterprise components

In Display, you can create a custom right click menu that can be used to launch any Windows exter-
nal application. Each menu item is associated with a particular asset in your Enterprise, and it is
visible as a menu option only for that asset. For example, you can create a custom right click menu
item that associates a particular compressor train with a particular Excel workbook. By right click-
ing on the asset, you can launch the application, called a custom executable. You can also create
other custom menu items that associate different assets with different Excel workbooks, and you
can create additional custom menu items for an asset that can launch any Windows application.

To create a custom executable:

1. Open the Enterprise Hierarchy to show the asset you wish.

2. Right click on the asset and select Add Executable... . The Custom Executables
window will appear.

Press New to create

a new menu item

Use buttons to
browse for files

Text that will appear as a menu item

Windows command that launches application

(optional) Path of document you want to open

Configuring a Custom Executable menu item

 Linking applications to Enterprise components 49

3. Click on the New button.

4. Enter the Menu Text you wish to see in the right click menu.

5. Enter the name of the executable file (if it is registered in Windows), or browse
for the executable file.

6. Enter the path and name of the file you wish to open with the application, or
browse for the file.

7. Click OK.

When you right click on the asset, a new custom executable menu item will appear. Selecting the
item will launch the application.

The right click Custom Executable menu

50 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

Layouts and the View menu

The Display window can be organized in many different ways, depending on your needs. The sev-
eral panes can be rearranged by dragging them to new positions. Also, you can close any pane by
clicking on the small “x” in the upper right corner of the pane. Your particular organization scheme
will be saved when you exit Display, and Display will use those settings the next time you open it.

The View menu can be used to control the layout of the Display window.

To control the visibility of the Enterprise Hierarchy panes:

Select View/Enterprise, and select or deselect the Hierarchy or View options.

To control the visibility of the Instrument Hierarchy panes:

Select View/Instrument, and select or deselect the Hierarchy or View options.

The View menu has three predefined layouts.

The Management Layout shows only the Enterprise Hierarchy, Enterprise View, and the pane con-
taining the Plot Session Manager, Collection Groups, and Bargraph Session Manager. This layout
is very useful when you will not need to refer to the instrumentation information in the Instrument
Hierarchy. In the menu, select View/Layout/Management.

The Instrument Layout will show only the Instrument Hierarchy and Instrument View. Select
View/Layout/Instrument.

The Default Layout presents the Enterprise and Instrument Hierarchies and Views, along with the
pane with the Plot Session Manager, Collection Groups, and Bargraph Session Manager. Select
View/Layout/Default Layout.

If none of these are quite what you want to see, you can close panes, move panes around, and resize
them. If you become confused, you can recover by using one of the preset layouts. When you quit
Display, your settings will be saved and used the next time you start Display.

Groups, Areas, Plants, and Buildings

There are several different elements in the System 1 Enterprise Hierarchy that serve to organize
assets or information for easy access. These elements exist only for organizational purposes, much
the same way that file folders or directories organize information in your computer’s file system.
Instead of only one type of organizational element, System 1 has several that, for the most part,
correspond to the physical elements of your plant or Enterprise. All of the elements in the
Enterprise Hierarchy structure are built using the System 1 Configuration Application during the
 Groups, Areas, Plants, and Buildings 51

configuration of your System 1 platform. The structure can be edited or changed only by an
Administrator using System 1’s Configuration application.

Groups and Areas are used to organize any collection of items that have common factors or pro-
duce similar information. Usually Groups are used to organize assets by category rather than by
physical location.

Examples of Groups include:

All pumps in the plant

All recently overhauled machines

All tanks containing final product

All boiler feed pumps

All electric motors

In the figure, a Group has been created that Plant

contains critical electric motors.

Areas Buildings

Areas are typically used to organize objects

Group
that occupy the same physical location.
Typically, an area will contain a group of
objects such as buildings or machine trains.
Usually Areas correspond to the organization
of the physical assets in your Enterprise.
Plants, Groups, Areas, and Buildings
Examples of Areas include:

Gas Processing Area

Tank Storage Area

Chemical Processing Area

Maintenance Parts Area

Buildings correspond to the buildings in the plant. The use of Buildings in the System 1 Enterprise
Hierarchy is optional, but recommended. Using Buildings helps you to maintain your orientation
as you move around in the Enterprise Hierarchy.
52 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

Plants generally consist of a group of buildings or areas. A plant corresponds to an entire business
unit at a particular location. Your Enterprise may include several plants in different locations, or it
may consist of only one plant. System 1 does not require a plant at all if you prefer a different orga-
nizational structure, but maintaining physical similarity is helpful when navigating in the
Enterprise Hierarchy.

Machine trains and machine components

Rotating and reciprocating machinery usually form the core of the plant process. In the Enterprise
Hierarchy, a Train is System 1 software terminology for a machine train: a group of machines that
share a common driver or driven machine, a common shaft, or several shafts connected through a
gearbox.

A Train consists of several machine components. In the figure below, the Enterprise Hierarchy has
been expanded to include the components of two machine trains that are located in the Ethylene
Building. The Ethylene Compressor Train consists of a steam turbine, turbine coupling, gearbox,
compressor coupling, and ethylene compressor. The Oil Lubrication Pump Train consists of a lube
oil motor, lube oil coupling, and lube oil pump.

Machine Train

Components
of Ethylene
Compressor Train

Machine Train
Components
of Oil Lubrication
Pump Train
Custom Asset

Machine trains and components

 Custom Assets 53

Custom Assets
An asset is anything that has value in your process. Assets can range from raw materials and feed-
stock, to piping systems, to rotating and reciprocating machinery, to storage tanks, to your final
product. System 1 software allows you to manage much more than machinery; with System 1 you
can manage all of the assets in your Enterprise.

System 1 software has a class of objects called Custom Assets, a generic category that can be used
for assets that do not fit other predefined asset types in the System 1 software. Custom assets might
include non-rotating equipment such as extruders, belts, electrical circuits, heat exchangers, boil-
ers, portable machinery, fork lifts, or other pieces of equipment. Custom assets have their own user
defined properties.

In the figure on the previous page, a Lube Oil Storage Tank appears below the Oil Lubrication
Pump. This tank is configured as a Custom Asset.

Examining the properties of objects in the hierarchy

Properties are characteristics of an object. Each type of element or object in a hierarchy has a set
of properties associated with it. The number and type of properties will vary depending on the type
of object. For example, a steam turbine may have an extensive set of properties such as the name,
manufacturer, model and serial number; the type of turbine (HP, IP, LP, etc.), exhaust type, and lay-
out; the number of stages and blades per stage; process temperatures, pressures, and flow rates; bal-
ance resonance speeds, design operating speed, rotor weight, and rotation direction. Other types of
machines will have a different mix of properties. Simpler devices will have fewer properties.

To examine the properties of an object, you must have the System 1 Configuration application
installed on the same computer as Display, and you must also have the System 1 Configuration
User Right set by the System 1 Administrator.

To examine the properties of an object:

Right click on the object and select Properties.

A new window will open displaying the properties. (This may take some time as Display retrieves
the information from the Configuration Database.) There will be tabs at the top of the window that
allow you to access different sets of properties of the object. You can change any fields that are not
gray. Those properties that appear gray are for information only and can only be changed from
within the System 1 Configuration application or from within the 3500 monitoring system config-
uration.
54 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

The figure below shows the Property window for the Steam Turbine in the Ethylene Compressor
Train. The General tab has been selected.

The User Name is a convenient name that you can easily recognize. The Tag Name is another name
you can use. For example, the Tag Name might be the name that appears in a plant identification
system. In the hierarchies, either or both names can be displayed, depending on the settings made
during the configuration process.

The Active box indicates whether System 1 data acquisition software will collect data for this com-
ponent and all subcomponents. If the checkbox is selected then the component is considered active,
and data for this component will be collected, stored, and used by System 1. If this check box is
gray and cannot be adjusted, then the activity of one of the components above it in the hierarchy is

Properties window for the Ethylene Compressor Train Steam Turbine

 Points and Variables 55

either Inactive or Unconfigured. If it is unchecked, then this component will be inactive, and the
Data Acquisition (DAQ) software will not collect data for this component or for any of its sublev-
el components.

When you click OK, any changes will be saved.

The contents and tabs in the Properties window will be different for different types of objects. You
can click on the different tabs to access more of the properties of an object. In each screen, you can
click on the Help button for more information.

Points and Variables

In its simplest definition, a Point is a location where data is collected. A Point can represent a phys-
ical location, such as a measurement transducer or a specific output from a software application (or
control system) that calculates a value and sends the result to the System 1 DAQ.

Points are objects in the Enterprise Hierarchy. During the configuration process, each online Point
is mapped to a specific device, such as a monitor channel that passes along a signal from a trans-
ducer, a portable data collector that records data from a transducer, or another software application
that calculates or provides a value. Bently Manual Input is used to manually enter a Point value
from the keyboard of the DAQ computer.

A transducer can collect either static or dynamic data for a single Point. Static data consists of a
single sampled value, for example the pressure, temperature, or voltage. Dynamic data consists of
a large set of data samples collected over a short period of time. An example of dynamic data is a
vibration waveform consisting of hundreds of individual digital voltage samples.

Static data is described by a single numerical value such as 575 kPa or 1250 °F. Dynamic data can
be displayed (often in a timebase or orbit plot) or subjected to further signal processing to produce
values that characterize the dynamic waveform in some way, such as filtered amplitude and phase.
Dynamic data can also be processed to produce other data such as a spectrum.

A Variable is a particular type of information that can be obtained from data collected at a Point.
Depending on the nature of the Point, it can have one or several Variables associated with it. A
Point that collects only static data will have only one Variable, for example, temperature, pressure,
or flow. A Point that collects dynamic data, which can be processed many ways, can produce many
Variables depending on the type of measurement being made. Examples of dynamic data Variables
for a Vibration Point include direct amplitude, gap, Not 1X amplitude, and amplitude and phase
values for one or more waveform frequencies, such as 1X, 2X, etc.

You can identify Points and the Variables that are available by further expanding the Enterprise
Hierarchy.
56 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

Points are displayed

around machine train
with current data values

Enterprise View

Enterprise Hierarchy

Variables

Points

Variable

Variable

Points and Variables in the

Enterprise View and Hierarchy
 Points and Variables 57

In the figure at left, the Management Layout has been selected in the View menu
(View/Layout/Management Layout). The Enterprise Hierarchy has been partially expanded
below the Steam Turbine in the Ethylene Building, and the Steam Turbine has been selected in the
Enterprise Hierarchy.

The Enterprise Hierarchy has been expanded several levels below the Steam Turbine. The hierar-
chy shows the Turbine Rotor, the Outboard Turbine Bearing, and a Point named BRG01Y. This
Point represents an eddy current shaft relative transducer that is installed near the Outboard Turbine
Bearing, and it acts as the Y probe of an XY pair. (The X probe can be seen directly below the Y
probe in the hierarchy.)

This Point is a Snapshot™ Vibration Point that collects dynamic data (using the Bently Nevada
Snapshot™ portable data collector). Beneath this Point are several Variables: Direct, Direct
Max/Min/Avg, Gap, etc.; each of these Variables are calculated when data is collected; after upload,
they are stored in the System 1 Historical Database for this Enterprise.

Directly below the Outboard Turbine Bearing is a Point labeled Turbine Inlet Pressure. This Point
measures static data; in this case the Variable is Pressure. Another Point farther below is labeled
EGT #1, another static measurement; here the Variable is Temperature.

Note that the Enterprise View at the top of the Display screen shows the entire Ethylene
Compressor Train. If you select any level in the hierarchy below the Train level, the entire machine
train will always be displayed in the Enterprise View. In this case, the Steam Turbine is highlight-
ed, reflecting the fact that the Steam Turbine has been selected in the Enterprise Hierarchy below.
In the view, individual Points are arranged around the images of the machine elements. Current val-
ues for the Variables are displayed beneath the Point name, and the color of the text reflects the
alarm status.

Points that measure dynamic data can display current values for several variables, depending on
how the Point has been configured. If you have the System 1 Configure application installed on the
same computer running Display, you can control which variables are displayed in the Enterprise
View.

To control which Variables are displayed in the Enterprise View:

1. In the Enterprise Hierarchy, right click on the Point of interest and select
Properties. The Properties window will be displayed.

2. Select the Variables tab.

3. At the upper right edge of the Properties window, go to the column labeled Show
in View and check the boxes next to the Variables you want to display.
58 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

Types of Points
Points fall into several categories.

Process Points collect data from transducer signals, DDE, OPC, or manual input. Process Points
include parameters such as temperature, pressure, flow rate, tank level, valve position, electrical
current, or radiation levels. Process Points typically collect static data.

Speed Input Points collect data from phase reference sensors such as Keyphasor® transducers,
optical sensors, magnetic pickups, or stroboscopes. Speed Input Points produce a repeatable phase
reference.

Table of Vibration Point Variables

Variable Meaning
Direct (amplitude) Unfiltered peak-to-peak waveform amplitude
Gap Gap voltage representing average shaft centerline position
1X amplitude and phase Amplitude and phase of signal filtered to running speed
2X amplitude and phase Amplitude and phase of signal filtered to twice running
speed
Not 1X Amplitude of unfiltered waveform after 1X component is
removed
nX amplitude and phase Amplitude and phase (for integer n) of signal filtered to n
times running speed
Smax amplitude Largest peak-to-peak amplitude of an unfiltered orbit
Synchronous waveform Waveform sample initiated at Keyphasor event
Asynchronous waveform Waveform sample not initiated at Keyphasor event

The Snapshot portable data collector performs additional onboard signal processing of measured
dynamic data and provides some additional vibration variables.

Variable Meaning
Direct max/min/average The maximum, minimum, and average values of the vibra-
tion signal during its collection period
Prime Spike Amplitude of spectral band from 1 to 7 times the rolling ele-
ment bearing element passage frequency
Rotor Region Amplitude of spectral band from 1/4X to 3X rotor speed
Spectrum Amplitude versus frequency of waveform sample
 Orphaned Points 59

Speed Reference Points are also known as simulated Keyphasor signals. If there is no Keyphasor
signal present (which would serve as a Speed Input Point), an expected operating speed can be con-
figured by the operator. This speed reference is used as the speed input for vibration calculations
for the Point. Because of differences between the actual shaft speed of a machine and the expect-
ed operating speed, Speed Reference Points do not produce a repeatable phase reference.

Vibration Points are collected from transducers that measure the vibration response of a machine
rotor and/or casing (displacement, velocity, or acceleration). Vibration Points collect dynamic data
and can have many associated Variables, as shown in the table.

Enumerated Points (DDE Enumerated Points) associate a numerical value with a text value. This
is especially useful for tracking changes to valve position, breaker positions, or machine status.
Enumerated Points can be used to convert any numerical value coming in through DDE into a text
value for display. Such a Point might map the numeric values 1, 2, and 3 to text values Low,
Medium, and High.

Inspection Points collect a description of the condition or a qualitative appraisal of a location.

Inspection Points are associated with portable data collectors and can be used for a variety of pur-
poses, including describing the physical look of a location, guaranteeing that a certain location is
checked visually with every route, checking the status of a process, etc.

Custom Points are portable data collector Points that do not fit into one of the categories described
here. You can assign any properties to a Custom Point that you want it to have. You may also con-
figure Custom Points for already existing Point types if you want to give them some specific col-
lection parameters. You must use the System 1 Configuration application to do this.

To determine the type of a Point, you must have the System 1 Configuration application installed
on the same computer as Display. Right click on the Point and select Properties. The Point type
will appear in the title of the Properties window.

Orphaned Points
Orphaned Points are Points for which the configuration has been changed in a way that makes data
taken before the change incompatible with data taken after the change (for example, different units
of measurement). Orphaned Points also include Points that have been deleted from your Enterprise.
These Points are saved in this category to allow you to access the historical data that was collect-
ed for these Points.

For example, an existing accelerometer on a machine casing is damaged and replaced with one that
uses metric units instead of English units. In this case, the Point’s configuration properties now
need to be changed in the Enterprise. The data that was collected from this Point before the con-
figuration change is no longer valid with the new configuration information. However the old his-
60 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

torical data for this Point will be available under the Orphaned Points item located lower in the
Enterprise Hierarchy.

Orphaned
Points

Orphaned Points in the Enterprise Hierarchy

The Instrument Hierarchy

The Instrument Hierarchy is used to display the various hardware and software devices that are
used to collect data in your System 1 Enterprise. A single Enterprise can have multiple DAQ com-
puters, monitoring systems, and instrumentation. This display format is useful for viewing the cor-
relation between instrument channels and specific instrument hardware, for viewing plots and bar-
graphs of Points from specific data collection devices, and for determining what data collection
instrument is measuring a Point that is in an alarm state.

The figure on the opposite page shows both the Enterprise (left pane) and Instrument (right pane)
Hierarchies for the Enterprise named DemoVersion2. This Enterprise has one DAQ computer,
named Demo Data Acquisition Server, that is located at the second highest level in the Instrument
Hierarchy. Looking down the Instrument Hierarchy along the second vertical line from the left, you
can see that this DAQ receives data from Portable Data Collectors, two 3500 monitor racks, and
one DDE server; it also sends data to the OLE Automation Exporter. At the very bottom of the
Instrument Hierarchy are Orphaned Points that correspond to the Orphaned Points in the Enterprise
Hierarchy.

The Enterprise Hierarchy has been expanded to show the Point named BRG04Y. This is a Point on
Bearing 4 of the Ethylene Compressor that is part of the Ethylene Compressor Train. Looking far-
ther up the Enterprise Hierarchy, we can see that this machine train is located in the Ethylene
Building in the Gas Processing Area of the Rutherford Plant.

The Instrument Hierarchy shows the signal path for the Point BRG04Y. This eddy current trans-
ducer signal utilizes one channel of a 3500/40 Proximitor® Module that is located in a 3500 rack
named 3500 Rack - Compressor Train. The 3500 rack communicates to the System 1 DAQ com-
puter via the TDXnet Communications Processor. This processor is located at the bottom of the
rack hierarchy.
 The Instrument Hierarchy 61

System 1
DAQ Computer

Equivalent
Points

Variables

TDXnet
Communications
Processor

The Instrument and Enterprise Hierarchies

62 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

Note that the Point BRG04Y is highlighted in the Instrument Hierarchy. Display has automatically
highlighted the corresponding Point in the Enterprise Hierarchy. This feature can help you identi-
fy which instrumentation Point corresponds to a Point in the Enterprise Hierarchy and vice versa.
To use this feature, you must have both hierarchies expanded in such a way as to expose the Points
in question.

The same measurement Variables can be seen below each corresponding Point in both hierarchies.
At the most fundamental level, the Enterprise and Instrument Hierarchies converge to the same
thing: the Point and its measurement Variables.

Setting Hierarchy Filters

The Enterprise and Instrument Hierarchies are complex structures. When they are fully expanded,
it can become difficult to maintain your orientation. Where are you? Good naming conventions for
your various nodes and Points can help, but sometimes you may wish for a simpler picture that
summarizes only that information you need at the moment.

Hierarchy Filtering allows you to display only those parts of an Enterprise that share common char-
acteristics that you select.

To configure your Enterprise Hierarchy

Filter:

1. Select the Filtered Enterprise

Hierarchy tab at the bottom of the
Enterprise Hierarchy pane.

2. In the Enterprise list, select the

Enterprise you wish to display.

3. In the Type list, select the common

element you wish to display. The
filter will display all elements in
the Enterprise Hierarchy sharing
this common characteristic. For
example, you might select Train
(lower in the list; scroll down to see
it) to show only machine trains.

4. In the Status list, select the alarm

status you wish to see. The filter
will display only those parts of the Filtered Enterprise tab
 Setting Hierarchy Filters 63

Enterprise that have that alarm status. This is a convenient way to show only
those items needing your immediate attention. Or, you can leave it at the default
setting, All, which will display items regard-
less of alarm status. (Alarms will be discussed
in detail in the next chapter.)

5. Click Save Filter to save this filter configura-

tion for future reuse. Enter a name for the filter
and click OK. In the example at right, the filter
name will be Machine Trains.

6. Click Update to activate the filter. The pane

now displays the Enterprise Hierarchy filtered
according to your settings. In the example below, the hierarchy shows only the
machine trains in the hierarchy. The gray Updated field will reflect the date and
time that the filter setting was last applied to the hierarchy. Always click Update
before examining the filtered hierarchy. This will ensure that the display reflects
the latest information available.

Date and time last updated

Your custom
filter name

What this filter

looks for

Alarm status that

is displayed

The Filtered
Filtered Enterprise Hierarchy
Enterprise Hierarchy
64 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

You can repeat this procedure to create as many different filters as necessary. If you save each one
with a different, recognizable name, you can quickly change the appearance of your hierarchy dis-
play to meet different display needs.

Click on the Enterprise Hierarchy tab at the bottom of the pane to change back to the standard hier-
archy display.

The Instrument Hierarchy can be filtered in the same way. Follow the same procedure. The Type
list will contain elements that appear in the Instrument Hierarchy.

Deleting Hierarchy Filters

To remove a Hierarchy Filter setting:

1. Select the Filtered Enterprise Hierarchy tab at the bottom of the Enterprise
Hierarchy pane.

2. Select the filter name from the Filter list.

3. Click Delete Filter.

Routes
A Route is a set of measurement Points that are scheduled for periodic collection by an operator
using a portable data collector such as Snapshot. Routes appear at the bottom of the Enterprise
Hierarchy. In the example here, the Route hierarchy has been expanded; four routes are configured
for this Enterprise.

Each Route consists of a set of Points. The Route hier-

archy can be expanded, and it will duplicate enough of
the Enterprise Hierarchy to show where the Points are
located.

Off Tour Points (Off Tour Measurements) are measure-

Routes
ment Points that were not created as part of a scheduled
route. Each of these Points must be configured indi-
vidually by the Snapshot operator. Once collected, they
may be uploaded to a System 1 DAQ Server along with
the regular scheduled route. See your Snapshot docu-
mentation or the System 1 help application. Routes in the Enterprise Hierarchy

Routes are discussed in more detail in Chapter 6.

 Associations 65

Associations
An Association is a special relationship between two or more components in your Enterprise that
is used when data from different measurements is combined to perform certain types of signal pro-
cessing. The Association tells System 1 where to look for the data it needs.

To view the Associations for a Point:

1. Right click on a Point and select Properties.

2. Select the Associations tab. A list of Associations for this Point will be displayed.

The name of this Point

Other components associated with this one

Types of Associations used for this Point

The Associations Properties window for a Point

66 Chapter 4: A Guided Tour of the Display Environment

In this example, the Snapshot Vibration Point BRG01Y has two common Association Types: Speed
Input, and XY Pair. The Associated Component is the name of the other Point in each Association.

The Speed Input Association associates a Speed Input Point with this Vibration Point. To calculate
the 1X-filtered amplitude and phase, System 1 software collects the dynamic waveform from the
Vibration Point. It then uses the Keyphasor information from the Speed Input Point to determine
the rotor speed and to obtain the Keyphasor event that marks the beginning of the time interval used
to determine the phase.

The other Association, XY Pair, associates two, orthogonal Vibration Points. To construct a direct
orbit, System 1 software combines the simultaneously-sampled, dynamic waveforms from the two
probes. The Speed Input Association is also needed to produce Keyphasor dots in the orbit.

See Help: Index/Associations, Types for a listing of Association types.

Collection Groups
A Collection Group is a set of Points whose simultaneous data collection is triggered by a single
event such as an alarm. When an event happens to one Point in the Collection Group, data is col-
lected for all Points in the Collection Group. This is useful for determining the state of your
machine or operation at the time an alarm, shutdown, startup, or other event occurred. By having
data taken for several Points at the same time, it is easier to evaluate the state of your operation.
Data is collected simultaneously for Points associated with the same Keyphasor transducer. If a
Collection Group spans multiple Keyphasor transducers, data will be collected in a manner as close
to simultaneous as possible. This data is a valuable aid in diagnosing the root cause of alarm con-
ditions.

The simplest example of a Collection Group is that defined by the Keyphasor input on a TDXnet
Communications Processor. All of the Points assigned to a single Keyphasor input signal automat-
ically become a Collection Group.

Collection Groups form another hierarchy in Display, and they can be nested to control how data
acquisition will take place when events occur. Data acquisition and Collection Group nesting will
be covered in Chapter 6.

To view your Collection Groups:

1. In the Display menu, select View/Layout/Default Layout.

2. Click on the Collection Groups tab at the bottom of the right pane.

You can expand the Collection Group Hierarchy to view the Points in each group.
 Collection Groups 67

In this example, the TDXnet - DDE Collection Group has been expanded. Two Collection Groups
are nested below it: DDE Collection Group, and TDXnet Shaft Speed Collection Group. The Points
in each Collection Group are shown in the hierarchy below each group.

To view the Collection Group properties, right click on any Collection Group and select
Properties. Click on the Help button in this window for information about the different options
that are available and their meaning.

You can view and configure Collection Groups in the System 1 Display application; however, cre-
ating, modifying, and deleting Collection Groups are all functions of the Configuration Software.

Collection Group

Points in
Collection Group

Collection Group

Collection Groups

Points in
Collection Group

Collection Group
Plot and Bargraph Session Managers
Two additional tabs appear at the bottom of the right pane in the Display window Default Layout
(View/Layout/Default Layout). These are Plot Session Managers.

A Plot Session is a preconfigured and formatted set of data plots that you create. A Plot Session
acts as a shortcut that allows you to display frequently used plots with a single mouse click.

A Plot Session Manager is a pane that lists all your data Plot Sessions in hierarchical form. This
manager is used for data plots such as trend plots, orbit timebase plots, polar and Bode plots, spec-
trum plots, etc. These types of plots can be used to display both real time and historical data.

The Bargraph Session Manager is used to manage bargraph plots, which display only real time
data.

We will discuss how to create, save, and use Plot Sessions in Chapter 7.

Plot Session Manager Bargraph Session Manager

Plot Session tabs at the bottom of the Display window

Chapter 5

Alarms and Events

Now we are ready to discuss a very important feature of System 1: alarms and events. Alarms and
events give you timely warning of potential problems that may be developing in your Enterprise.
In this chapter you will learn what alarms and events are, how to manage the display of alarm and
event information, and how to view current data and alarm settings.

In this chapter

Topic Page
What is an event? 70
What is an alarm? 71
Alarm color and severity 71
Protection (hardware) alarms 72
Management (software) alarms 73
Blinking colors: new events or alarms 74
The stoplight icon: Point Status notifications 76
Before acting on an alarm or Point Status 77
Locating the source of the problem 78
The Current Alarms Display 80
Power tool: the Event Manager 82
Filtering information in the Event Manager 85
Event Manager shortcuts 89
Using Bargraphs to examine current data 90
Stopping blinking: Acknowledging events 93
Alarms from portable data collectors 94
Using the Journal Editor to document action 96
Viewing basic alarm settings 98
Viewing Spectral Band settings 102
Viewing Acceptance Region settings 104
Inhibiting alarms during Transient events 105
Configuring alarm sounds 107
70 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

What is an event?
An event is something that takes place that is potentially important enough to require your atten-
tion. An event can be thought of as a change in status of a Point or software module; most events
notify you of a change in System 1 software operation. Events are used to monitor the operating
status and condition of your assets, and help you troubleshoot potential problems affecting the
proper operation of your System 1 platform. Events often indicate whether or not data is being col-
lected correctly (communications failure, instrument failure, etc.).

Events are generated when a status change occurs in either direction. For example, a transducer Not
OK condition may be detected that triggers an event; in this case, the event would be the transducer
entering the Not OK condition. If the transducer subsequently becomes OK again, a new event will
be generated; now the event would be the transducer leaving the Not OK condition.

System 1 software has several categories of events, some of which are listed in the table below.
More categories are being added as System 1 continues to evolve.

System 1 has a powerful tool, the Event Manager, that is used for examining and managing events.
We discuss the use of the Event Manager later in this chapter.

System 1 event categories

Category Uses Examples

System System 1 operational issues Configuration changes, DAQ starts
and stops, Data export status, soft-
ware license warnings, Reference
Data collection initiated
Instrumentation Hardware or transducer problems Keyphasor errors, monitor hardware
problems, transducer Not OK warn-
ings
Observation Code Portable data collector observa- Dirty condition, Broken belts,
tions Cavitation, Out of Service
Note Written observer or operator Journal Entry, Observation Note
entries
Communications External software communica- Problems with NetDDE Points, Data
tions issues collection starts and stops, TDXnet
configuration changes, spreadsheet
communication problems
Transient Changes in machine speed Data buffer uploads, data collection
triggers, startup and shutdown initi-
ated
 What is an alarm? 71

What is an alarm?
Events are notifications of situations that may affect the proper operation of your System 1 plat-
form or your Enterprise. An alarm is a special kind of event that warns you of a change in or a
potential problem with one of your plant assets; it is a software or hardware driven notification that
an important measured value has crossed a previously configured setpoint. The crossing of this set-
point triggers the alarm.

Alarms can be set to monitor any Variable, from Vibration Variables in rotating or reciprocating
machinery to the value of an imported item of data from another software application. Thus, alarms
can be used to notify you of a change in any plant asset or calculated value.

Alarm color and severity

The severity of an alarm describes how serious the alarm is. System 1 software features four lev-
els of alarm severity (five if you include the normal, no alarm condition). Each alarm is color
coded; you can immediately recognize the presence of a new alarm and determine its severity by
the presence of blinking colors in the Enterprise and Instrument Hierarchies. Alarm severity colors
are also displayed in the Enterprise and Instrument Views and Bargraph displays.

System 1 alarm colors and severity

Color Severity Meaning

Red 4 Equivalent to a monitor Danger
alarm. Machinery damage may be
imminent, and action should be
taken immediately.
Yellow 3 Equivalent to a monitor Alert alarm.
Machinery damage may be immi-
nent, and the situation should be
investigated immediately.
Orange 2 The situation is not yet critical, but
needs to be investigated in a timely
manner.
Blue 1 Should not be ignored, but can be
investigated after higher priority
alarms.
Green 0 Conditions are normal; no alarm set-
points are exceeded.
No color No communication with the DAQ for
or orange this part of the Enterprise.
72 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Protection (hardware) alarms

Protection alarms are generated in online monitoring systems (this is why they are sometimes
called hardware, or hw, alarms), and they operate independently of the System 1 software plat-
form. These alarms are used to protect critical plant machinery in situations where continued oper-
ation could lead to machine damage, injury to personnel, serious environmental impact, or eco-
nomic loss. They are often used in situations where rapid and automatic response is required and
set in the online monitoring system to trigger relays that automatically shut down machinery.

Protection alarms cannot be configured using the System 1 Configuration application; they must
be configured in the monitoring system.

System 1 software collects Protection alarm information from the monitoring system and displays
it as a severity 3 or 4 alarm. System 1 presents 3500 monitor Protection alarms in the following
way:

Alarm equivalents for 3500/3300 monitoring systems and System 1

Color Monitor alarm type System 1 severity Description

Red Danger/Alarm 2 4 Danger
Yellow Alert/Alarm 1 3 Alert
 Management (software) alarms 73

Management (software) alarms

Management alarms are programmable software alarms that are implemented as part of the System
1 platform. Management alarms are associated with Variables and are designed to notify you that
something important is changing, giving you time to manage the potential problem. Management
alarms cannot be used to automatically shut down machinery; Protection alarms in the hardware
monitoring system are used for that purpose.

System 1 software has several management alarm types that are shown in the table below.

Level alarms and Band alarms are used the most often and can be used with either Process Points
or Vibration Points. Acceptance Region alarms require vector data from Vibration Points, and
Spectral Band alarms require dynamic asynchronous waveform data from either Vibration Points
or Dynamic Process Points.

There are many different types of Spectral Band alarms available. For a complete list, see Help:
Contents/Configuration Library/Learn About Configuration/Learn about Spectral Bands or
Help: Index/Spectral Bands.

System 1 Management (software) alarms

Alarm Type The alarm occurs when the measured value...

Level Over moves above the established setpoint.

Level Under drops below the established setpoint.

In-Band enters a prohibited band between two setpoints.

Out-of-Band leaves an allowed band between two setpoints.

Phase leaves an allowed range between two angle setpoints.

Acceptance leaves a quasi-rectangular region in a polar coordinate

Region system between two amplitude setpoints and two
phase setpoints.

Circular leaves a circular region in a polar coordinate system

Acceptance defined by a configurable Reference Vector and
Region radius.

Spectral Band exceeds an energy level setpoint in an established fre-

quency band.
74 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Blinking colors: new events or alarms

A blinking color in a hierarchy or view indicates that a new (unacknowledged) alarm or important
event has occurred. Examples of important events are alarms, a transient event (a startup or shut-
down), or a Not OK condition (a transducer or software module that fails to produce a useable
value). Because these types of events are important, blinking is used to alert you that an important
new event has occurred. Blinking will be accompanied by an audible alarm if Display has been
configured to do this. We discuss how to configure sounds later in this chapter.

It is important to understand the difference between a current alarm and an unacknowledged alarm.

A current alarm exists as long as the measured variable continues to violate its alarm setpoint(s).
An exception to this rule is a latching alarm, a monitor alarm that remains current even if the vari-
able returns to normal.

An unacknowledged alarm or important event is a new change in status that has not yet been
acknowledged by the user. Blinking will occur for any unacknowledged change in alarm or impor-
tant event status in either direction, for both entry and exit from a condition. For example, if a
Variable returns to a normal state, the change in state from a current alarm to a normal condition
will constitute a new, important, unacknowledged event that will trigger blinking.

Thus, color and blinking are independent of each other. The severities of current alarms are shown
by color. The presence of unacknowledged alarms (new alarms) are shown by blinking.

Alarms in Display will continue blinking until they are acknowledged. Note that blinking will only
occur for an important event or alarm having to do with a Point in a hierarchy. Less important types
of events such as an Enterprise configuration change will not trigger blinking.

To summarize the alarm and event displays:

1. Color indicates the severity of an alarm. Color propagates up the hierarchy, and
the highest severity dominates. At any particular node in the hierarchy, the color
at a node will depend on the highest severity level that exists at or below that
node. Thus, if two Points below a particular node are in alarm, one at Severity 3
(yellow) and one at Severity 4 (red), then that node will be red, the higher sever-
ity. This allows you to immediately recognize the most serious condition that
exists in your Enterprise.

2. Blinking indicates that one or more unacknowledged alarms or important events

have taken place. Blinking also propagates up the hierarchy. Blinking indicates
that a new change in alarm or event status has occurred.

3. Color is independent of blinking. The blinking of an alarm indicates that a new

 Blinking colors: new events or alarms 75

alarm or important event has occurred, but the color of a blinking alarm may not
indicate the severity of the new alarm. The color may be associated with a pre-
viously acknowledged, but more severe, current alarm.

For example, assume that no current alarms exist. Suddenly, a Vibration Point Variable triggers a
Severity 4 alarm (red). This event will trigger a blinking red color in the hierarchy. Later, the plant
operator acknowledges the alarm; the blinking stops, but as long as the alarm remains current, the
red color will remain. Later another Vibration Point Variable triggers a Severity 3 alarm (yellow);
this will trigger blinking up the hierarchy, but the original red color will remain because red would
reflect the most severe current alarm status for that part of the hierarchy.

For another example, again assume that no current alarms exist. Suddenly, a Vibration Point
Variable triggers a Severity 3 alarm (yellow). This event will trigger a blinking yellow color in the
hierarchy. Later, the plant operator acknowledges the alarm; the blinking stops, but as long as the
alarm remains current, the yellow color will remain. Later the same Vibration Point Variable
returns to normal. The current alarm state switches to normal (green), but the change in alarm sta-
tus will trigger green blinking up the hierarchy.

In the Views, the color coding and blinking work in a similar way. At the Train level or below, the
text for each Point displayed around the Train will have a color reflecting its current event or alarm
status, and that color will be blinking if the alarm or event has not been acknowledged.

Some important alarms and events that cause blinking

Alarms Color Severity

No Data Yellow 3

Not OK Yellow 3

Protection Alert/Alarm 1 Yellow 3

Protection Danger/Alarm 2 Red 4

Management Alarm Programmable Programmable

Acceptance Region Alarm Programmable Programmable

76 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

The stoplight icon: Point Status notifications

A Point is a location where data is collected by hardware (such as a vibration transducer) or soft-
ware (such as a DDE Point). Points are critical to the flow of information into System 1. Because
of this, System 1 continually monitors each Point’s Point Status and will notify you if a problem
occurs. A change in Point Status is logged as a System 1 event.

An Active Point Status means that something is currently wrong

with the data coming from a Point, and it is indicated in the hier-
archy by a horizontal stoplight icon. This icon propagates up the
hierarchy in the same way as an alarm color. Thus, the presence of Active
Point Status
a stoplight icon means that an active Point status notification exists indicators

somewhere in the hierarchy below the node where it appears.

Active Point Statuses can occur for a variety of reasons as shown in the following table.

Some important Point Status notifications

Point Statuses Meaning

Status Not Received Data has not been acquired yet.
Inactive Data will not be collected for this Point.
Not OK A transducer or software element is not operating properly.
No Data An attempt was made to get data, but no data was available.
Bypass Data collection has been temporarily disabled for a Point.
Alert Bypass The Alert alarm is temporarily disabled in the monitor.
Danger Bypass The Danger alarm is temporarily disabled in the monitor.
Trip Multiply A Protection alarm setpoint has been modified temporarily for
startup or shutdown.
Protection Alarm Inhibit Some or all monitor alarms in a rack have been temporarily
disabled.
Management Alarm Inhibit A management alarm has been temporarily disabled.
Invalid Configuration The point is not configured correctly.
Latched Alarm A monitor alarm was triggered and will remain in the alarm
state until reset at the monitor.
Reassigned Keyphasor The primary Keyphasor transducer became unusable, so the
point was reassigned to a backup Keyphasor.
Simulated Keyphasor The Keyphasor signal is based on an assumed speed and is
not from an actual transducer.
Invalid Keyphasor The Keyphasor signal is missing or unreliable.
 Before acting on an alarm or Point Status 77

Up to this point, we have been discussing how to recognize alarms and events. Now we will dis-
cuss how to manage and act on them.

Before acting on an alarm or Point Status

Before acting on an alarm or Point Status indication, verify that the DAQ is communicating with
Display. If the DAQ is not communicating, then the information you are viewing may not be cur-
rent. System 1 Version 3.0 and later will show a non-blinking Severity 2 (orange) for all parts of a
hierarchy affected by a loss of communication with the DAQ.

To verify DAQ communication:

1. Select the blinking node or Point of interest in the hierarchy.

2. Check the communication status notice at the bottom right of the Display win-
dow. You may have to widen the Display window to reveal this notice.

If you see DAQ: Communicating, then your event or alarm data is current.

If you see DAQ: Not Communicating, then communication between Display and
the System 1 DAQ for this part of the Enterprise has been disrupted, and the dis-
played event information may not be current. You should reestablish DAQ com-
munication before you act on any alarm or event information.

To reestablish communication with a DAQ:

1. Launch the Data Acquisition Control Manager (DACM) by selecting

Start/Programs/Bently Nevada/System 1 Data Acquisition.

2. In the DACM, verify that the DAQ you need is running. If the DAQ is running
(it will show a green dot above the DAQ icon), go to step 3. If the DAQ is not
running, see Chapter 2.

3. In Display, close your Enterprise. Select Enterprise/Close/Your Enterprise

Name.

4. Reconnect to your Enterprise (see Chapter 3).

78 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Locating the source of the problem

To locate a Point that is in alarm, follow this basic procedure:

1. Examine the most severe alarm first. Red is associated with the highest Severity
4 alarm. Next is yellow for Severity 3, then orange for Severity 2, blue for
Severity 1, and green for Severity 0, or normal. Remember that a blinking green
color means that something did happen, but the Point is now in a normal state.

2. Follow the blinking color trail down into the hierarchy. Open each node and look
for the same color at the next lower level. Continue opening nodes until you can
see the Variables under a Point.

To locate source of alarm,

follow alarm color
down into hierarchy

Locating the source of an alarm in the Enterprise Hierarchy

 Locating the source of the problem 79

It is possible that multiple alarms with the same severity may exist below one or more nodes. You
can use Hierarchy filtering to show all Points that are in alarm at or above a particular severity
level. One possible configuration is shown here.

Hierarchy Filtering helps you locate multiple alarms quickly

In this example, the filter Type is Point, and the filter Status is set to Severity 3 and higher. With
these settings, you will see only those Points with active Severity 3 or Severity 4 alarms. This sim-
plifies the task of locating the sources of multiple alarms.

To locate a Point that has an Active Point Status, follow the stoplight icon down into the hierarchy.
80 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

The Current Alarms Display

Use the Current Alarms Display to see a list of any currently active alarms and statuses that exist
at or below a node of interest. This window will display all of the current alarm and status types,
but it will display only one instance of each type. Use this display to quickly summarize all active
status and alarm information for a particular node.

To launch the Current Alarms Display:

Right click on the hierarchy node or Point of interest, and select Item Status... .
The Current Alarms Display will open. Multiple Current Alarm Display win-
dows can be open simultaneously.

Selected node in hierarchy Color indicates highest active alarm severity.

Blinking indicates a new alarm is active.

List of Active List of Active

Point Status types alarm types
at or below at or below
selected node selected node

The Current Alarms Display

 The Current Alarms Display 81

In the Current Alarms Display window, the right pane lists all current alarms at or below the select-
ed node (the Segment Name in the Current Alarms Display window). The colored oval next to
Active Alarm Statuses displays the color of the highest severity alarm in the list, and it blinks if any
alarms are unacknowledged.

The right pane will also show any status notifications for Variables that exist below the selected
node. For example, the term Inactive will appear if any Variable below the selected node is
Inactive. System 1 will not collect data for inactive Points and Variables.

The left pane of the Current Alarms Display shows any Active Point Statuses for Points below the
selected node.

The Current Alarms Display will show only one instance of each active status notification or alarm,
even if multiple instances of statuses or alarms exist.

Use the Current Alarms Display together with the Hierarchy Filter to get a quick overview of what
alarms exist in your Enterprise. Here are two suggestions:

1. Configure an Enterprise Hierarchy Filter (see Chapter 4) to show only your

Buildings. Set the filter Type to Buildings and the filter Status to All. Update the
filter, right click on a Building, and launch the Current Alarms Display. You will
be able to quickly view all current statuses and alarms for that Building.

2. Configure an Enterprise Hierarchy filter to show only your machine trains that
have Severity 3 or 4 alarms. Set the filter Type to Trains and the filter Status to
Severity 3 and higher. Your filtered hierarchy will display the alarm severity col-
ors for each machine train. Update the filter, right click on a machine train, and
launch the Current Alarms Display. You will see current alarms for that Train. Be
careful. With this filter setting you will not see any alarms lower than Severity 3
in the filtered hierarchy display. Configure another filter with a Status of All to
see all of the current alarms for your machine trains in the hierarchy display.

The Hierarchy Filter and the Current Alarms Display form a powerful combination for quick
assessment of alarm conditions in your Enterprise. It is a good idea to configure several Hierarchy
Filters before an alarm occurs. Save the filters with names that you can quickly recognize. That
way, when an alarm does happen, you can quickly assess the situation.

For more information, see Help: Contents/Display/Display Features/Alarms/Current Alarms

Display.
82 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Power tool: the Event Manager

The Current Alarms Display shows only current alarms and special status notifications for Points
and Variables. It does not show any other kind of event, and it does not display any historical event
and alarm information.

For the broadest and deepest view of event information, use the Event Manager. The Event
Manager is a powerful tool that allows you to examine both current and historical alarms and
events, and to sort and filter information in many different ways. If you wish to look at historical
event information, you must use the Event Manager.

The Event Manager will display historical and current events for all items at or below a selected
node in a hierarchy. If you launch the Event Manager from a node in the upper part of the hierar-
chy, you will see any events associated with items at or below that level.

To launch the Event Manager:

Right click on the Point or node of interest and select Event Manager... . The
Event Manger window will appear.

Date/time and Boldface is

quantity filtering unacknowledged
event

Event
filtering
settings

Complete
location
of event

Event
List

Date and Type of Brief Where did When the Is this a

time of event description this happen? event was reference
event acknowledged event?
Who
acknowledged
Severity the event If manual,
of event who
initiated
event
The Event Manager
 Power tool: the Event Manager 83

In the example here, the Event Manager is displaying a list of events for an entire Enterprise. The
amount of information seems overwhelming at first, but the Event Manager has many features that
allow you to control what is displayed. We will discuss some of these features shortly, but first, we
will review what this default window shows.

Note that the first entry is boldface. Boldface identifies an unacknowledged event, a potentially
important item that has occurred recently and may require your immediate attention.

The first column shows the date and time of the event; the most recent event is listed first. This is
the default display for the Event Manager. Click on the Date/Time header to sort events with the
oldest event first. Click again to sort by most recent event first.

The second column displays the Severity of the alarm or event. Click on the Severity header to sort
all events in order of severity, with the lowest first. Click again to sort with the most severe first.

The next two columns display the Event Category and Description. The category is the type of
event. The description entry shows whether the Point entered or left the event status and a brief
description of the problem. You can also sort the event list alphabetically by clicking on the head-
ers for these columns.

The Path column displays the location of the item associated with the event in the format
Parent\Item. Depending on the type of event, the Item can be a Variable or a higher level object
such as a DAQ computer. The Parent is the next higher item in the hierarchy. In this context, the
displayed path segment is part of the structure of the hierarchy tree, much the same as a file sys-
tem hierarchy in a computer.

To view the full path of the Item associated with the event:

Check the Full Path box immediately above the Date/Time header at the top of
the event list.

Check to enable Full path display

84 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

The full path will most often be shown as the path of the item in the Enterprise or Instrument hier-
archy, but it can also be shown in a Route Hierarchy or in a Collection Group hierarchy.

The next two columns show the date and time the event was acknowledged and who acknowledged
it. We discuss acknowledgement of events and alarms later in this chapter.

The next column is Initiator. This column records the name of the person who manually triggered
a data collection event or made a configuration change.

The last column is Transient. Under certain circumstances you can mark a Transient event as a
Reference event to be used later. The entries for this column are either Yes or No. A Reference
Transient event will be marked with a Yes.

You can control the visibility and order of columns that are displayed in the Event list. With this
feature, you can display only those columns that you wish to see.

To control the visibility and order of columns:

1. In the Event Manager window, click on Select Columns... . The Column

Configuration window will appear.

Press buttons to move

column descriptions
Displayed in
Available, but Event Manager
not displayed window

Controlling column visibility in the Event Manager

 Filtering information in the Event Manager 85

2. To remove columns, select a column name in the Visible Columns list and click
the button with the left arrow. The column name will jump to the Available
Columns list. Repeat this procedure until the Visible Columns list shows only
those columns you wish to view.

3. To control the display order of a column, select the column name in the Visible
Columns list and drag it up or down to reposition its display order. Repeat this
process until the order of columns is what you want.

4. Click OK to finalize your selections. The changes you made will be reflected in
the Event Manager window.

5. If you want to use these settings next time you open the Event Manager, click the
Save Settings button in the Event Manager window. If you do not do this, the cur-
rent settings will be lost when the Event Manager window is closed.

Filtering information in the Event Manager

The large amount of information presented in the Event Manager can make it difficult to find the
information you are looking for. To help you simplify the presentation, there are several different
filters available that allow you to see only those events that are most important to you.

To filter by Severity Level:

Select or clear the check boxes at the upper left of the Event Manager window.
You can select a level to show only that severity, or you can select any combina-
tion of severities.

Filtering the Event Manager by Severity Level

86 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

To filter by Event Type:

1. Click on the Select Filter(s)... button. The Filter Selection window appears.

Check to show all events

Clear to show only unacknowledged events

Press to check all

Filtering the Event Manger by Event Type

2. Check the Acknowledged box to show both acknowledged and unacknowledged

events. Clear this box to display only unacknowledged events.

3. Check or clear individual event types to control their visibility in the Event
Manager list. A check mark displays that type of event in the Event Manager list.

4. Click Reset to include all types in the Event Manager list.

5. Click OK to finalize your changes.

6. If you want to use these settings next time you open the Event Manager, click the
Save Settings button in the Event Manager window. If you do not do this, the cur-
rent settings will be lost when the Event Manager window is closed.
 Filtering information in the Event Manager 87

The Event Manager can be configured to show only certain types of events by using a feature called
Exclusive Filtering. Exclusive Filtering is available for Start Up, Shut Down, Management alarms,
and Protection alarms.

To use Exclusive Filtering:

Select or clear the check boxes in the Exclusive

Filtering section of the Event Manager window.

Exclusive Filtering takes precedence over other Event Manager filters. For example, selecting
Management Alarms will display all Management alarms, regardless of either the Severity Level
or the Select Filter(s) configuration.

By default, the Event Manager will automatically show only events that occurred during a time
period defined by the Plotting Range, another name for the Default Data Range set in Display. (We
will discuss how to change the Plotting Range settings shortly.) The current Plotting Range is dis-
played at the bottom center of the Display window. By default, events listed in the Event Manager
will be limited to that range.

Gray is default
Plotting Range

Start date/time

End date/time

Maximum number of events

that will be displayed

Viewing the data range and number of events

Another limit also applies: the number in the Maximum Returned Events box in the Event Manager
window. The Event Manager will list a maximum number of events corresponding to the number
in this box.

The Event Manager uses the Range and the Maximum Returned Events limit together to determine
what number of events will be listed. Assuming no other filters are active, the Event Manager will
display the events in the date Range to a maximum of the Maximum Returned Events limit. If more
events exist in the selected Range, then a maximum number of events will be displayed that cor-
responds to the Maximum Returned Events setting.
88 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

The modify the data Range:

1. Check the Range box. This will activate the From and To windows.

2. Click on the small button at the right of the From field. A calendar will appear.
The currently selected date is shown with an ellipse in inverse color. Today’s date
is shown at the bottom of the calendar.

Press to
update
Event List Press to launch
Use buttons to move calendar
forward or backward in time

Selecting the data Range

Current setting
highlighted

3. Click on the buttons at the top of the calendar to go back or forward in time, and
select the date by clicking on the day in the calendar.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the To field.

5. Click the Reload button to update your event list.

6. Click Save Settings in the Event Manager window if you want to have the same
Range settings the next time you open the Event Manager.

To modify the number of Maximum Returned Events:

1. Double click in the Maximum Returned Events field.

2. Enter a number greater than zero up to a maximum of 10,000. Note that entering
a large number in this field may produce a significant delay as System 1 software
searches the database. Enter a relatively small number first (perhaps 300); you
can increase the size later as necessary.
 Event Manager shortcuts 89

3. Click the Reload button to update your event list.

4. Click Save Settings in the Event Manager window if you want to have the same
settings the next time you open the Event Manager.

Event Manager shortcuts

The Event Manager provides direct access to much of the same information you can access in the
hierarchies. Events are associated with an item (a Point or instrument); each entry in the Event
Manager list corresponds to the item shown in the Full Path. By right clicking on an entry, you can
access many of the same right click menu options you would see for the corresponding Point or
node in a hierarchy. You can check active Point and alarm status, view properties, display data
plots, launch a new Event Manager window, and more. Note that, to view properties, you must
have the System 1 Configuration application installed on the same computer that is running
Display and you must have the View Software Configuration User Right.

To view the active Point and alarm status of the item associated with an event:

Right click on the event and select Item Status... .

To view the properties of the item associated with an event:

Right click on the event and select Properties... .

To launch another Event Manager window from within the Event Manager:

Right click on an event and select Event Manager... . A new Event Manager
window will appear. The new Event Manager window will list events associated
with the item in the original event list.

For example, suppose you open your first Event Manager window by right clicking on a Train in
your Enterprise Hierarchy. This Event Manager window will list all events associated with Points
in that Train. (Depending on your filter settings, it may also list other types of events.)

Now suppose one of your Points shows an alarm status that you wish to investigate further. You
can right click on the event entry for that Point and open another Event Manager window. This new
window will list events associated with that Point and will not show events associated with other
branches in the hierarchy.
90 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Using Bargraphs to examine current data

Bargraphs allow you to examine the current data for any Point. Use the Bargraphs to quickly exam-
ine the current data values of a Point in alarm.

To launch a Bargraph:

Right click on the Point and select Bargraph. A set of Bargraphs will appear that
display the current data for all the Bargraph-configured Variables for that Point.

In the example on the opposite page, the Steam Turbine driver for the air compressor has gone into
alarm. The hierarchy has been expanded down to a Vibration Point named Bearing #2Y, and the
Bargraph for that Point has been launched and is shown at right. The new window contains a set
of Bargraphs, with one Bargraph for each configured variable. In this case, the Variables are direct
vibration amplitude, gap, 1X amplitude, and 1X phase.

The first three Bargraphs are presented in a standard Bargraph format. The alarm setpoints are
shown by horizontal lines in each Bargraph. The color of the vertical bar in each Bargraph is the
same as the current alarm status, and the height of the bar is proportional to the current value of the
measured Variable.

In this example, the Direct vibration amplitude is 14.17 mil pp, and the scale of the bar extends
from 0 to 20 mil pp. The current value exceeds the Severity 4 alarm setpoint of 6 mil pp, and the
bar is red.

The Gap measurement is in a Severity 3 alarm status, and the vertical bar is yellow. The 1X ampli-
tude has no alarm setpoints, and it shows green, indicating a normal condition.

The 1X phase is shown as a small polar plot, with the direction of rotation shown by the curved
arrow, and the 0° mark coinciding with the transducer orientation. The phase is shown by a line
from the origin, in this case, 284° phase lag, measured from 0° opposite the direction of rotation.

The current alarm status is displayed at the bottom of the set of Bargraphs for this Point. The color
of the dot indicates the highest alarm severity for this Point, and the text of the highest severity is
also displayed (in this example, Severity 4). The small black dot immediately above and to the right
of the alarm color dot indicates that this is a Protection alarm. A small black dot directly above the
alarm color dot would indicate a Management alarm. It is possible for a single Variable to trigger
both types of alarm.

Right clicking on a higher node and selecting Bargraph will display Bargraphs for all Points below
that node. In the figure, the Bargraph display for the Steam Turbine node is shown at left. The dis-
play contains all configured Bargraphs for all Points below that node. Note that many more
Bargraphs exist than are shown in the figure; use the scroll bar to access them.
 Using Bargraphs to examine current data 91

Enterprise
Hierarchy

Node name

Node name

Alarm Point name

setpoints

Current values

Current Point status

Alarm type: Management Protection

System 1 Bargraph displays

92 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Using a Bargraph, you can also examine the Current Values for a Point in a tabular form.

To display Current Values for a Point:

Right click on a Bargraph, and select Current Values. The Current Values win-
dow will be displayed.

Most recent data

Date/time of
most recent data

Check to show
Variable in
Bargraph

Scroll to see
more Variables

The Current Values Display

This example shows the Current Values for the same Point named Bearing #2Y. The colors indi-
cate the current alarm severity. This window displays more information than a Bargraph, including
the date and time of the last data update. You can also use this window to control which Bargraphs
are displayed for this Point.
 Stopping blinking: Acknowledging events 93

To control the visibility of Bargraphs:

1. Right click on a Bargraph to open the Current Values window.

2. Check or clear the boxes in the View column.

3. Use the scroll bar at right to bring more Variables into view.

4. Click OK. The Bargraph display will be updated to reflect your changes.

The Bargraph provides much of the same menu functionality as a hierarchy. By right clicking on a
Bargraph, you can access data plots, the Event Manager, the Current Alarms Display, Point prop-
erties, and other System 1 features.

We will discuss how to organize and customize Bargraphs in Chapter 7.

Stopping blinking: Acknowledging events

Each System 1 alarm condition is reported on various displays and panes within the System 1soft-
ware. New alarms will flash continuously to notify a user that an alarm condition exists at a par-
ticular component.

The only way to stop blinking and/or turn off the audible alarm is to Acknowledge the alarm.
Acknowledging an alarm does not remove the alarm, just stops it from flashing or making an audi-
ble sound. The color in the hierarchies associated with the alarm will remain as long as that alarm
is active.

Acknowledging alarms turns off the blinking and sounds associated with all unacknowledged
alarms and events in the Enterprise. You cannot Acknowledge individual alarms or events sepa-
rately. To Acknowledge an alarm or event, you must have the Acknowledge Alarms/Events User
Right set by your System 1 Administrator. Users who have this right should be the people who are
responsible for reacting to the alarms and should be trained in the required corrective actions for
specific machinery conditions.

Application Alert: An untrained user with this right might inadvertently

Acknowledge an important alarm, thus preventing other personnel from
being notified of an important situation.
94 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

To Acknowledge alarms and events:

1. Launch the Event Manager either by right clicking on a node in a hierarchy or by

selecting Tools/Event Manager... . The Event Manager window will appear.

2. Click on the Acknowledge button or right click anywhere in the Event Manager list
and select Acknowledge. A dialog box will appear asking if you are sure that you
want to acknowledge all events.

3. Click OK.

Alarms from portable data collectors

Portable data collectors are normally used in conjunction with Routes to gather data during a
scheduled inspection tour by plant personnel. The data is stored in the collector and, when data col-
lection has been completed, the data is uploaded to System 1.

When the data is part of a defined Route, the System 1 Configuration database contains Point con-
figurations and alarm setpoints. System 1 compares the new data to the alarm setpoints and trig-
gers an alarm if the data values are outside setpoint boundaries. When this happens, uploading data
from a portable data collector will produce blinking alarm indications in Display.

The next scheduled data collection might not take place for quite some time, possibly weeks, and
the alarm status would normally remain active until System 1 received more data showing that the
data level had changed to a non alarm level. Even if an alarm was acknowledged, a colored alarm
indication would remain in the hierarchy.

To prevent this problem, System 1 allows you to remove the alarm status for a portable data col-
lector Route. For portable data collectors, the alarm status should only be removed after the appro-
priate personnel have been notified and the problem has been addressed.

Application Alert: Be careful using the Remove Alarm Status command.

Once you remove an alarm status, you remove it for everyone who is con-
nected to, or will be connected to, the selected Enterprise. Removing the sta-
tus could cause problems when the responsible parties don’t respond to the
situation. If it is not your responsibility to respond to particular alarm situ-
ations, DO NOT remove the status.
 Alarms from portable data collectors 95

To remove the alarm status from a portable data collection Route:

1. Right click on a Route icon in the Enterprise Hierarchy.

Removing the alarm status

for a Route

2. Select Remove Alarm Status. A warning will appear asking if you are sure you
want to do this.

3. Select Yes. The alarm status will be removed for all of the Points in this Route,
and the alarm color for this route will change to green.

To stop blinking, Acknowledge the alarm:

1. Launch the Event Manager either by right clicking on a node in a hierarchy or by

selecting Tools/Event Manager... . The Event Manager window will appear.

2. Click on the Acknowledge button or right click anywhere in the Event Manager
list and select Acknowledge. A dialog box will appear asking if you are sure that
you want to acknowledge all events.

3. Click OK.
96 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Using the Journal Editor to document action

The Journal Editor is a convenient way to add a note to document information about alarms or
events and any actions you have taken; it is also a good way to store important information about
any component in your Enterprise. Journal Entries can be used to add written comments about any
component; to view history or background information about specific components, machines,
areas, plants, etc.; to benchmark process changes, inspections, or other procedures; or to notify oth-
ers concerning the status of a procedure, the results of testing, or a response to an alarm situation.
Journal entries are specific to a particular component. They are saved in the Configuration
Database for the selected Enterprise.

To create a Journal Entry:

1. Right click on an Enterprise component and select Journal Editor... . The

Journal Entries window appears.

Enter Journal Entry text here

Check this box to display entries
from this level and all sublevels
in the hierarchy

Other Journal Entries Set the severity

for this level of the event
Check this box to mark Set the date and time
this entry as an event if different from current

The Journal Editor

 Using the Journal Editor to document action 97

2. Click New to create a new entry.

3. Enter the text you wish to save as a Journal Entry. It is a good idea to include
your name or initials so that others can contact you for more information.

4. Check the Mark as Event box if you wish the Journal Entry to appear in the Event
List.

5. Enter the Severity level of the Journal Entry. The Severity level you choose will
appear in the Event Manager.

6. Modify the date and time of the Journal Entry if you wish. The date and time
default to the current values if you make no changes.

7. Select Close to close the Journal Entries window. You will be prompted to save
your changes; click Yes to save.

You can also edit existing Journal Entries. Follow the same procedure to launch the Journal Entries
window for the component, select the entry you wish to edit, make your changes, close the win-
dow, and save your changes.
98 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Viewing basic alarm settings

In Display, you can view the properties of any alarm in your Enterprise, and you can change the
properties of any Management (software) Alarm. To do this you must have the System 1
Configuration application installed on the same computer running Display, and you must also have
the View Software Configuration User Right (to view alarm properties) or the Edit Software
Configuration User Right (to change alarm properties). Alarms are associated with Points. To view
the alarm properties of a Point:

1. Right click on a Point in either the Enterprise or Instrument Hierarchy and select
Properties. The Properties window for this Point appears.

Name of
this Point
Variables tab

Level and In- Spectral Band Acceptance Region

and Out-of-Band alarms alarms
alarm setpoints

Accessing alarm settings

 Viewing basic alarm settings 99

2. Click on the Variables tab. Depending on the type of Point you have selected, this
window will have buttons that access alarm properties. In the example at left, we
have selected a Vibration Point named BRG04Y.

3. Click on one of these buttons: Alarm Setpoints, Spectral Bands, or Acceptance

Regions. Not all of these buttons may be visible for every Point. In this example,
we will click on the Alarm Setpoints button. The Setpoints Configuration win-
dow appears (next page).
100 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

This window is used to access Level and In- and Out-of-Band hardware and software alarm set-
tings for the Variables associated with this Point.

Select Variable

Select alarm type

Check box to activate alarm

Select alarm type Set alarm severity Setpoints

Accessing alarm setpoints

 Viewing basic alarm settings 101

At the top of the window is a list of setpoint categories. This selection acts as a filter to display only
those types of alarms matching the selected criterion. The default is All Setpoints, but you can
select any other filter in the list.

For this Point there are three tabs labeled Direct, Gap, and 1X, which are available Variables that
can have Level and In- and Out-of-Band alarms. Clicking on a tab will display the filters associat-
ed with that Variable.

Immediately below the tab is a bargraph with lines that display the current alarm settings for this
Variable. The colors of the lines on the bargraph show the severity level of the alarms.

Below the bargraph display is an area where you can select which type of alarm to display. The fig-
ure shows that Level has been selected; only Level alarms are currently displayed. Clicking on In-
Band or Out-of-Band will display only those types of alarms.

At the bottom of the window is a list of alarms. The first alarms listed are Protection alarms (HW)
and are grayed out because they are set in the online monitor configuration and cannot be changed
from within a System 1 software application. The settings are visible for reference only.

Each alarm has a check box showing whether the alarm has been enabled, some text displaying the
type of alarm, the severity, a minimum level, and a maximum level. There is text immediately
above the Severity and Minimum fields describing the full scale amplitude range that is available
for this Variable.

There are six individual alarm fields at the bottom of the window. Four of these are immediately
visible; you can see the other two by using the scroll bar at right. The first two of these are
Protection (HW) alarms, the next four are Management (SW) alarms.

In the figure above, one Management alarm is Enabled; its Type is SW Over Alarm A. It has a
Severity of 3, and it will trigger if the Direct vibration amplitude exceeds 2.80 mil pp. There are
four SW alarms that can be configured, labeled A through D. In this example only the A alarm has
been configured.

An SW Over Alarm will trigger when the measured parameter exceeds the Minimum value config-
ured for the alarm. In the example, there is no maximum value associated with this type of alarm,
so the Maximum fields display N/A (Not Applicable).

An SW Under Alarm will trigger when the measured parameter falls below the Maximum value
configured for the alarm.

Alarm configuration is usually done in the System 1 Configuration application, but if your work-
station has the Configuration application installed, you can change some alarm settings from with-
102 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

in Display. If any of the SW alarm fields are white, then you can modify the alarm configuration.
Also, if any other checkboxes are white, then you can enable and configure a new alarm from with-
in Display. Management alarms can be set for any type of Variable collected by System 1, although
the type of alarm available will depend on the kind of data being measured.

Application Alert: Inappropriate alarm settings can result in false or missed

events! Important alarms should be set or changed only if you thoroughly
understand the behavior of your asset and the consequences of incorrect
alarm settings. Contact your Bently Nevada Service representative for
advice.

Setpoint alarms can be Level, In-Band, or Out-of-Band; for any Variable, only one of these three
Setpoint alarm types can be Enabled at one time.

Viewing Spectral Band settings

Spectral Band alarms trigger when a Variable’s amplitude within a specified frequency range
exceeds a specified level. Such an alarm is useful for tasks such as detecting high vibration in the
Prime Spike region for a rolling element bearing. Another application would be to monitor vibra-
tion amplitude in a blade pass or vane pass frequency range.

To view the Spectral Band alarms for a Point:

1. Right click on a Point and select Properties.

2. Select the Variable tab.

3. Click on Spectral Bands... . The Spectral Band Configuration window will be

displayed.
 Viewing Spectral Band Settings 103

In this example, a Spectral Band alarm has been configured to monitor the vane pass frequency on
an induction motor driven pump with five vanes. The filter Type is Vane Pass. During operation,
the pump speed is around 3580 rpm (59.7 Hz), so the center frequency was set to five times this
value (298 Hz) with a bandwidth of 30 Hz.

Clicking on the Band Frequency... button shows that the beginning and ending frequencies for this
spectral band are 283 Hz and 313 Hz.

Note that you can enter the spectral band frequencies using either the beginning and ending fre-
quencies in this window or the center and bandwidth in the previous window. The other format will
be calculated automatically.

Returning to the previous window, clicking on Display Scales... will produce the Display Scales
Configuration window. This window allows you to change the full scale setting on the real time
data bargraph for this measurement. This allows you to scale your bargraph to better display your
data.
104 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

Viewing Acceptance Region settings

An Acceptance Region is a quasi rectangular region on a 1X or 2X polar plot that defines accept-
able operation. The boundary of the region is determined by a range of amplitude and another range
of phase. Movement of the vibration vector outside of any boundary of the Acceptance Region will
trigger an alarm. Acceptance Regions are used for long term monitoring of vibration under steady
state operating conditions.

To view your Acceptance Region settings for a Point:

1. Right click on a Point and select Properties.

2. Select the Variable tab.

3. Click on the Acceptance Regions... button. The Acceptance Regions window will
appear.

Rotation

0° 270°

A
B
90° 180°
4 Full Scale

Acceptance Region settings

 Inhibiting alarms during Transient events 105

In this example, two 1X Acceptance Regions have been created. Both are centered on 2.5 mil pp
@ 135°. The top region in the list is named SW Acceptance Region A (the letter A is outside the
limit of the display). It is a smaller region and has been given a Severity level 2. The next region
is SW Acceptance Region B; it has larger boundaries and has been given a Severity level 3. With
this arrangement, if the 1X vector for this Point crosses the first Acceptance Region boundary, it
will trigger a level 2 alarm; further movement of the 1X vector outside the second Acceptance
Region would trigger a level 3 alarm.

Inhibiting alarms during Transient events

System 1 software defines a Transient event as a machine startup or shutdown. Most rotating
machines operate above one or more resonances. During startup or shutdown, vibration amplitudes
while transiting a resonance can be significantly higher than those existing during steady state
operation at normal running speed. If vibration amplitude during a startup were to exceed a steady
state alarm setpoint, then the machine could trip off line and abort the startup. For this reason, mon-
itoring systems often use Trip Multiply to provide additional setpoint margin during startups.

System 1 allows you to temporarily disable (inhibit) Management (Software) alarms during
Transient events. This feature is normally set in the System 1 Configuration Application, but if you
have the Configuration application installed on the same computer as Display, then you can enable
or disable this feature from Display. You must also have the System 1 Edit Software Configuration
User Right set by your System 1 Administrator.

This feature is associated with a DAQ computer, not with individual Variables, so inhibiting
Management alarms will inhibit all Management alarms controlled by that DAQ.

Application Alert: You should change the settings for this feature only if you
thoroughly understand the behavior of your asset and the consequences of
incorrect settings. Contact your Bently Nevada Service representative for
advice.
106 Chapter 5: Alarms and Events

To enable or disable the alarm inhibit feature:

1. Make the Instrument Hierarchy visible by selecting View/Instrument/

Hierarchy.

2. Locate the DAQ computer that controls the alarms you wish to inhibit.

3. Right click on the DAQ computer icon and select Properties... . The Properties
window will appear.

Check this box

to inhibit System 1
Management Alarms

Inhibiting alarms during Transient events

4. Check the box labeled Inhibit Software Alarms During Transient Mode.
Checking the box will disable Management alarms associated with this DAQ
during Transient events. Clearing the check box will allow Management alarms
to operate normally.

5. Click OK.
 Configuring alarm sounds 107

Configuring alarm sounds

You can assign a unique notification sound for individual alarm severities.

To assign a sound to an alarm:

1. From the menu, select Tools/Options. The Options window will appear.

2. Select the Sounds tab.

Press button Check this box

to hear sound play to enable alarm sounds

Select alarm
Severity level
that plays
this sound

Browse for
sound file (.wav)
 3. Check the box labeled Play Application Sounds.

4. Select the Severity level for the sound. In this example, Severity 4 has been
selected.

5. Locate the sound file you wish to play with this severity level. Select Browse to
locate the wave (.wav) sound file on your computer.

6. Select Play to preview the individual sounds.

7. Click OK.

You can disable alarm sounds by clearing the Play Application Sounds check box.
Chapter 6

Controlling Data Collection

System 1 collects data from a wide variety of sources: hardware monitoring systems, portable data
collection systems, plant control systems, and software applications. In this chapter, you will learn
how System 1 collects data during steady state conditions, alarm conditions, and during Transient
events. You will also learn how to upload data from a portable data collector (PDC), manually enter
data, and collect a set of reference data.

In this chapter

Topic Page
Data collection in System 1 109
Data collection rates during normal operation 110
Change Filtering: reducing data storage requirements 112
Collection Groups and data collection during alarms 116
Data collection during transient operation 122
Collecting Reference Data 124
Examining, adding, and deleting Reference Data 126
Uploading data from a Snapshot™ portable data collector 129
Manual data entry 136

Data collection in System 1

During normal operation, System 1 periodically collects data from all of the configured Points in
your Enterprise. The frequency of data collection varies according to hardware and software capa-
bilities, but it is adequate to provide excellent temporal resolution of your processes.

Protection of critical rotating and reciprocating machinery requires dedicated monitoring systems.
Their function is to monitor machine behavior and trigger alarms when measured Variables move
outside defined limits.

TDXnet and TDI act as interfaces between the System 1 platform and these monitoring systems.
They perform some signal processing and pass static data, dynamic data, and alarm and Point sta-
110 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

tus information to System 1. Under normal operating conditions, System 1 polls these devices,
obtains data, determines whether any Management or Protection alarm setpoints have been exceed-
ed, and stores data in the Historical Database. During normal operation, System 1 software requests
data from these devices once per second.

Proper documentation of machine startups and shutdowns requires much higher data sample rates
than for normal operation. If a monitor generates a Protection alarm and trips a machine off line,
root cause analysis requires collection of both high density shutdown data and steady state data for
a period of time before the trip. Even routine startups and shutdowns require high data density to
support machine condition analysis. When required, TDXnet and TDI operate in a Transient data
collection mode and sample at high rates to achieve the required data density. After sampling, the
data is uploaded to System 1. The data collection event is labeled as a Transient Event in the
System 1 Event Manager, and the start and stop times are noted so that you can retrieve and dis-
play this data in Display. You will learn how to do this in Chapter 7. In this chapter we will discuss
data collection during normal, alarm, and transient operation.

Data collection rates during normal operation

Data is always flowing in and out of System 1. One or more Data Acquisition computers collect
data from monitoring hardware, DDE and OPC servers, portable data collectors, and, occasional-
ly, manual keyboard entry. At the same time, data exporters move data to external applications for
additional processing. All of these activities occur at rates that are determined by hardware and
software capabilities. The details of how all these various elements work is beyond the scope of
this book. This section is designed to give you an idea of typical data refresh rates that occur in
System 1. Just how fast does data move around?

During normal operation System 1 DAQ software requests data from monitoring sources (TDXnet
or TDI). Static (single valued) data is requested once per second and dynamic (waveform) data a
minimum of once every ten minutes. However, other devices may not be able to send or receive
data that quickly. The table on the opposite page summarizes the various default data transfer rates
in System 1.
 Data collection rates during normal operation 111

System 1 default data import and export rates. One sample every...

Device Static import (sec) Dynamic import (min) Export (sec)

TDXnet* 1 10
TDI** 1 10
NetDDE 4
OLE Automation Exporter 30
DDE Exporter 10

*TDXnet does not calculate nX vectors (vectors other than 1X and 2X). Because these vectors
are calculated in System 1 software from dynamic (waveform) data, the update rate for these
vectors is limited to the dynamic data import rate.

**TDI does calculate nX vectors, so the update rate for these vectors is the same as the static
data update rate, once per second.

Note that although System 1 obtains static data once per second, Bargraph and Current Value
displays may be updated at a slower rate if the system is very busy. These displays have a
lower priority than other system functions.
112 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

Change Filtering: reducing data storage requirements

A large Enterprise can generate an enormous amount of data that can overwhelm storage capacity.
Often during steady state operation, data values do not change significantly from one sample to the
next. If a value is the same, or nearly the same as the last one, why store it?

Change Filtering reduces the amount of data stored by collecting static data only when a measured
value changes or when a set time has elapsed since the last stored sample.

Change Filtering works on changes in magnitude and time as shown in the figure below. For mag-
nitude you can set a minimum required change either as a percent of full scale or as a change in the
absolute magnitude of the measurement. Change Filtering can also be applied to changes in vector
phase. To enable storage of a new sample, the magnitude change must meet or exceed your filter-
ing criteria.

For time you can set minimum and maximum time requirements for storage. The minimum time
setting helps to reduce the frequency of database writes to improve software and hardware
performance. The default values are ten seconds (minimum time) and six hours (maximum time).

Minimum
required
Storage allowed
change

Last Storage not allowed

stored
value Storage not allowed

Minimum Storage allowed

required
change
1 3
2 4
Start Min Max
time time time

Change Filtering

The rules of Change Filtering can be summarized this way:

1. If the elapsed time since the last data storage is less than the minimum time inter-
val (the region in the figure marked “1”), no data will be stored during this peri-
od regardless of how much the value changes. System 1 will retain the samples
with maximum and minimum values in memory temporarily, and it will note
whether either of these meet or exceed the Change Filtering setting.
 Change Filtering: reducing data storage requirements 113

2. When the elapsed time reaches the minimum time interval (the point in the fig-
ure marked “2”):

a) If any of the samples kept in step 1 meets or exceeds the required magnitude
change, they will be stored in the Historical Database along with the current
value (duplicates will be discarded, but at least one sample will be stored). At this
time, the elapsed time is reset to zero.

b) If no samples have exceeded the Change Filtering setting, then no action will
be taken.

c) If no magnitude change criteria have been enabled, then a sample will be

stored.

3. If the elapsed time is between the minimum and maximum time requirements
(the region in the figure marked “3”) and if a value meets or exceeds the Change
Filtering setting, then the samples containing the maximum and minimum values
(since the last data storage) will be stored in the Historical Database and the
elapsed time will be reset to zero.

4. If the elapsed time reaches the maximum time interval (the point on the figure
marked “4”), then the maximum, minimum, and current values (if different) will
be stored and the elapsed time will be reset to zero.

5. Data storage of a new sample resets the reference magnitude to the latest sample
and the elapsed time to zero. Change Filtering will compare future sample val-
ues to the newly stored sample value.

Change Filtering applies to the storage of static data but not to the storage of dynamic (waveform)
data. Waveform data is gathered and stored independently of any Change Filtering settings. Change
filtering is used only for TDXnet, TDI, DDE, Modbus DDE, OPC, or similar Points. Portable data
collector or manual entry Points have no change filtering capability.

Change Filtering applies only to storage, not to display. With Change Filtering active, current data
is always collected and displayed at the normal data collection rate.

Alarm calculations are unaffected by Change Filtering. Change Filtering has no effect on data that
has been uploaded because of an alarm or a transient. This data bypasses the Change Filtering algo-
rithm and goes directly to the Historical Database. Thus, no data is lost for these important events.
114 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

Change Filtering settings are user configurable and are individually set for each static Variable. A
Point with several Variables can have different Change Filtering settings for each Variable.

To view the Change Filtering settings from Display, the System 1 Configuration application must
be installed on the same computer as Display and you must have the View Software Configuration
and View Data User Right set by the System 1 Administrator. To modify Change Filtering settings
you must have the Edit Software Configuration User Right set by the System 1 Administrator.

Application Alert: Inappropriate Change Filtering settings can result in fail-

ure to store important data and/or impaired system performance. Be sure
you understand your needs and the behavior of your Variables before
adjusting Change Filtering settings. Contact your Bently Nevada service
representative for advice.

To access Change Filtering settings:

1. Right click on a Point or Variable, and select Properties... . The Properties win-
dow will appear.

2. Click on the Variables tab.

3. Click the Change Filtering... button. The Change Filtering window will appear.

Only available
Use % of Full Scale for vector No storage Storage no later
or Magnitude Variables before this time than this time

The Change Filtering window

 Change Filtering: reducing data storage requirements 115

This example shows some of the Change Filtering settings for a Vibration Point. Four Variables are
shown in the left column (Direct, Gap, 1X, and 3X Odd Harmonic). More Variables can be
accessed using the scroll bar at the extreme right of the window.

The Full Scale Ranges of the variables are shown in the second column. Note that these are the full
scale range capability of the measurements, not the Display Scale ranges shown in Bargraphs.
These values are displayed with the units of measurement, and they are provided for reference only.
They cannot be changed in this window.

The three main areas in this window are an Amplitude Change area, a Phase Change area, and a
Time Interval area.

The Amplitude Change area allows you to set amplitude Change Filtering one of two ways, by per-
cent of full scale or by a change in magnitude. You can use either method, but you cannot use both
simultaneously for a single Variable. The values entered are interpreted as having the same units of
measurement as the unit displayed in the Full Scale Range column. You control which method is
active by checking the appropriate box.

In this example, the Variable Direct has Change Filtering enabled for a change of 2.5% of the Full
Scale Range. This is equivalent to a change of 0.50 mil pp in level, and this value is displayed in
the gray box immediately to the right.

How does this work? Assume that a Direct amplitude sample for this Variable and Point was just
stored in the Historical Database. Future samples will have to differ (either up or down) from this
sample by at least 0.50 mil pp to be stored. However, the Time Interval requirement may operate
to prevent storage or force earlier storage.

The Change Filter for the next Variable, Gap, has been enabled for a change in magnitude of 0.6
V. The Gap for this Point will have to change by at least 0.6 V up or down from the last stored sam-
ple to enable storage of a new value. Again, the maximum Time Interval requirement affects the
timing of data storage.

The Phase Change area is used for filtered variables, such as 1X, 2X, or nX, where n is an integer.
Phase change can be used together with or independently of amplitude change. In this example, the
1X amplitude change requirement is set to 2.5% of Full Scale, and the 1X phase requirement is set
to 15°. Again, these settings are two-sided: a change in either direction will trigger storage of the
new values. Because vectors need both amplitude and phase to have meaning, satisfying either
change requirement (amplitude or phase) will enable storage of both values. If only one criterion
(phase or amplitude) has been enabled, then, after the minimum time has passed, any change in the
other criterion will force the sample to be stored.
116 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

Note that the amplitude and phase change requirements define a region similar in concept to an
Acceptance Region. The difference is that Acceptance Regions have absolute boundaries that, once
set, do not change with time. In the case of Change Filtering, the definition of the boundary
changes with each new sample that is stored in the Historical Database.

The Time Interval area is used to set the minimum and maximum elapsed times since the last stored
sample. A sample will not be stored earlier than the minimum elapsed time nor later than the max-
imum elapsed time.

Collection Groups and data collection during alarms

When something goes wrong with your process, it can be important to look at all the relevant data
that was collected in the period of time leading up to your process upset. Viewing data from a num-
ber of Points allows you to discover relationships in the data and more easily determine the root
cause of the upset.

A Collection Group is a set of Points whose data collection is triggered by a single important event
such as an alarm. When an alarm occurs for one Point in the collection group, data is collected for
all points in the Collection Group. Data collection within a group can also be triggered by another
Collection Group.

When a Collection Group is properly configured, a Protection or Management Alarm will trigger
enhanced data collection from Points associated with a TDXnet or TDI communications processor.
System 1 will:

1. Retrieve the 4 most recent dynamic samples (if they are available for a Point),
and

2. Retrieve the most recent 10 minutes of static samples for all Points in the
Collection Group.

This data bypasses the Change Filtering algorithm and is sent to the Historical Database. The stored
data will be at the normal data collection density.

Monitors generating Protection alarms may also trigger a machine shutdown which can lead to
even higher density data collection by TDXnet and TDI Communications Processors. We will dis-
cuss this important aspect of data collection in the next section.
 Collection Groups and data collection during alarms 117

To view your Collection Groups:

In Display, select View/Collection Groups.

The Collection Group pane will appear in the Display window.

Collection Groups

In this example, two Collection Groups exist, one named TDXnet - DDE Collection Group and
another named TDXnet, Keyphasor 1 Collection Group. As we will see shortly, each Collection
Group contains many Points.
118 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

A Collection Group must be configured to automatically store data when an alarm occurs. To view
the Collection Group settings from Display, the System 1 Configuration application must be
installed on the same computer as Display, and you must have the View Software Configuration and
View Data User Right set by the System 1 Administrator. To modify Collection Group settings you
must have the Edit Software Configuration User Right set by the System 1 Administrator.

Application Alert: Inappropriate Collection Group settings can result in

failure to store important data. Contact your Bently Nevada service repre-
sentative for advice.

To view or change your Collection Group alarm settings:

1. Right click on a Collection Group and select Properties... . The Collection

Group Properties window will appear (opposite page).

2. Check the Store Data on Alarm box to enable the Collection Group to store data
in the Historical Database when an alarm condition occurs that satisfies the min-
imum severity level indicated below this check box.

3. Check the two check boxes below Alarm Type to store data on a Protection
Alarm, a Management Alarm, or both.

4. Set the MINIMUM Severity level for the Management Alarm. Data will be stored
only when an alarm occurs that is at or above this severity level in a Point in the
group.
 Collection Groups and data collection during alarms 119

Trigger data storage

when alarm occurs

Trigger data storage

when Protection alarm occurs

Trigger data storage

when Management alarm occurs

Minimum required
Management alarm severity
to trigger data storage

The Collection Group Properties window

120 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

Multiple Collection Groups can be nested in a hierarchical relationship. The structure of the hier-
archy together with the individual Collection Group settings determine what data will be collected
under what circumstances.

A
B
This Collection Group
contains other
Collection Groups
(nested)

Nested Collection Groups

In this example, four Collection Groups are shown. Three have been fully expanded to show their
Points. These groups are labeled A, B, and C. Group A contains groups B and C as subgroups, also
called children of Group A because they are partially dependent on the actions of Group A. Group
A is called a parent of Groups B and C. Each Collection Group can have independent alarm and
minimum severity level settings. A Collection Group can contain both Points and other Collection
Groups.

The Collection Group hierarchy acts as a communication path to sequentially trigger data collec-
tion when appropriate. When a Point goes into alarm, the alarm information is first acted on in the
Collection Group where the Point is located. If that Group is configured to store data on alarm
AND the alarm severity is greater than or equal to the minimum severity level, then a decision is
made to begin collecting data for all the Points in that group. The alarm information is passed up
the hierarchy to the parent group where a new decision is made based on its settings. If the parent
group decides to begin alarm collection, it will send alarm information to all its children and up to
 Collection Groups and data collection during alarms 121

its parent if one exists. All parents and children will make independent decisions based on their
own alarm and severity level settings.

To see how this works, assume the following configurations for the Collection Groups shown in
the figure above:

Collection Group Store data on alarm? Minimum Severity Level

A Yes 3
B Yes 3
C Yes 3

If a Point in Group C goes into a Severity 2 alarm, no action will be taken because the severity level
is less than the minimum required.

If a Point in Group C goes into a Severity 3 alarm, then Collection Group C triggers storage of data
for all the Points in Group C. Because Collection Group A is a parent of Group C and its minimum
severity level is also 3, it receives the alarm information and triggers data storage for itself and all
of its children. Because Collection Group B is a child of Group A and is set to Store Data on Alarm
at a minimum severity level of 3, it receives the alarm information and also begins data storage.

Now assume another configuration:

Collection Group Store data on alarm? Minimum Severity Level

A Yes 3
B No 2
C Yes 2

If a Point in Group C goes into a Severity 2 alarm, it triggers data collection. The alarm informa-
tion is passed to the parent, Group A. Group A sees that the Severity 2 alarm is less than its mini-
mum required severity level, so it does nothing, and it does not send any information to Group B.
The only data collected will be from all the Points in Group C.

If a Point in Group B goes into a Severity 3 alarm, nothing happens because it is not configured to
store data on alarm.

Finally, one more example:

Collection Group Store data on alarm? Minimum Severity Level

A No 3
B Yes 2
C Yes 2
122 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

If a Point in Group C goes into a Severity 3 alarm, it will trigger data collection for Group C. The
alarm information is passed up to Group A. Group A is not configured to store data on alarm, so it
does nothing. The only data stored will be the data from all the Points in Group C.

If a Point in Group B goes into a Severity 3 alarm, similar logic applies, and the only data stored
will be from all the Points in Group B.

The previous figure shows a practical example of the use of Collection Groups. A Collection Group
named DDE Collection Group (Group B in the figure) contains several temperature and pressure
Points that communicate with System 1 through the NetDDE Data Collector Module. The TDXnet,
Shaft Speed Collection Group (Group C) contains several Vibration Points that communicate via a
3500 rack and TDXnet Communications Processor. Both Groups are set to store data on an alarm
with a minimum severity level of 3, as is the parent group, TDXnet - DDE Collection Group (Group
A). If a bearing overheats and triggers a Severity 3 Management alarm, data collection will be trig-
gered in both subgroups.

Data collection during transient operation

For the TDXnet and TDI Communications Processors, the term transient refers only to a situation
where the running speed of a machine is changing. It is not used in the classic sense to describe a
plant event where machine speed remains constant, but where one or more other parameters change
significantly in a short period.

Transient data collection is associated with a startup or shutdown of a rotating machine. Transient
data collection can be initiated by a normal startup or shutdown or by a machine trip that has been
triggered by a Protection Alarm. In all cases, data collection begins when the machine speed pass-
es a setpoint in the Communications Processor.

During the startup or shutdown, TDXnet and TDI Communications Processors enter a special
Transient Data Collection Mode, where data is sampled on preconfigured changes in rpm and time.
During the data collection period, data is temporarily stored in the Communications Processor,
some signal processing is performed, and the data is uploaded to System 1.

The amount of data collected during a transient event depends on the type of Communication
Processor in use.

When TDXnet is triggered:

1. It immediately stores the most recent 40 vector values and 4 waveform values (if
available for a Point). These samples provide a recent history of events just
before shutdown.
 Data collection during transient operation 123

2. It continues to store additional static (including vector) samples at a rate deter-

mined by its delta rpm and delta time settings.

3. It stores 1 dynamic (waveform) sample for every 10 static samples.

4. TDXnet stops collecting transient data when either its memory becomes full or
it senses the end of the transient event. It will collect up to 280 transient static
samples and 28 transient waveform samples. These are in addition to the recent
history samples that were stored in step 1.

TDI has more capability than TDXnet. When TDI is triggered, typically:

1. It immediately stores the most recent 10 minutes of 1-second-interval static data,

20 seconds of 0.1-second-interval static data, 2.5 minutes of 10-second-interval
dynamic (waveform) data, and 2 or 3 waveforms sampled at the trigger time.
These samples provide a recent history of events just before shutdown.

2. It continues to store additional static (including vector) samples at a rate deter-

mined by its delta rpm and delta time settings.

3. By default, it will store 1 dynamic (waveform) sample for every 10 static sam-
ples, but this is configurable.

4. When TDI senses the end of the transient event, it continues to store additional
data for an additional minute: 10 seconds of 0.1-second-interval static data, 1
minute of 1-second-interval static data, and 1 minute of 10-second-interval
dynamic (waveform) data.

Startups and shutdowns that trigger transient data collection are labeled as transient events in the
System 1 Event Manager. The event can be used to set the Plotting Range, allowing you to easily
locate the data for analysis. We will show you how to do this in the next chapter.

While the CPs are busy collecting and uploading data during a transient event, System 1 continues
to poll other Enterprise Points at the normal rate. This includes all DDE and OPC Points (whether
or not they are part of the active Collection Group) and any other Vibration Points that are not part
of any active Collection Groups. You will be able to examine this data together with the active
Collection Group data if you wish, but it will not have the same density.
124 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

Collecting Reference Data

Reference Data is a collection of data for a component or group of components that is taken at a
particular time to document Variables during a specific machine operating condition.

Reference data is used for two primary purposes:

1. To perform slow roll compensation of data plots. For this purpose, Reference
Data is taken at slow roll speed, a speed where the dynamic effects of unbal-
ance are negligible. Slow roll compensation is used for Vibration Points using
eddy current shaft relative transducers and allows you to remove the effects
of rotor bow and mechanical and electrical runout on the rotor shaft. .
Typically, slow roll Reference Data for this type of Point includes 1X and 2X
vectors, gap voltage, and waveforms.

2. To document baseline behavior in a machine that is running at operating

speed. This data is used for comparison at a later date. Decision Support™, if
it is installed, uses reference data to evaluate your machine condition. This
type of reference data can be collected for any Variable in your Enterprise.

Reference Data collection is controlled at the Collection Group level. A Point (with its Variables)
must be part of a Collection Group to enable you to obtain Reference Data. Reference Data col-
lection is performed for all Variables in the Collection Group at the same time.

To collect a set of Reference Data:

1. Ensure that your machine is operating in an appropriate condition for the data
you wish to collect.

2. Display the Collection Groups by selecting View/Collection Groups. You may

have to resize the Display window to see the Collection Group pane.

3. Go to the Collection Group that contains the Point you wish to collect data for,
right click on it, and select Data Collection/Collect Reference Data... . The
Reference Data Collection window will appear.
 Collecting Reference Data 125

The Reference Data Collection window

4. Enter a label in the area at the bottom of the window to identify the conditions
for this data set.

5. OPTIONAL: In the Plotting Default area, select Slow Roll, Gap, and/or
Waveform Overlay. System 1 software can use the selected data types as the plot-
ting default when displaying plots. Checking an option will cause the sampled
values to be used for all Variables in the Collection Group. Leaving these boxes
unchecked will not affect Reference Data collection. This area is only used to
notify plotting routines that default reference samples are available for use.
Applying the Plotting Defaults requires configuring plots to use them. We will
discuss how to do that in the next chapter.

6. OPTIONAL: In the System Default area, select Slow Roll, Gap, and/or Waveform
Overlay.

Application Alert: The System Default data is used by Decision Support™

when calculating rule outputs. Be very careful about changing the System
Defaults. If you cause inappropriate data to be stored, you can cause
Decision Support to produce erroneous output. It is better to leave these boxes
unchecked unless you are absolutely sure of what you are doing.

7. Click OK. System 1 software will immediately collect and save the Reference Data.
126 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

Examining, adding, and deleting Reference Data

Once collected, Reference Data is associated with individual Variables, and it can be examined or
deleted. You can also manually enter Reference Data. To perform these tasks, you must access the
data for each Variable.

To examine Reference Data:

1. In any hierarchy, right click on the Variable of interest and select Edit
Reference Data... . The Reference Data Selection window will appear. If
Reference Data has been previously collected for this Variable, the window will
show a list of data samples with the sample values.

Full path to this Variable

This sample was marked as

List of previously a default reference for
stored samples both System and Plotting

Check one or both

boxes to change
selected sample to
a default Reference

The Reference Data Selection window

2. Click Done to close the window.

 Examining, adding, and deleting Reference Data 127

The example shown here is for the Direct Variable for a Vibration Point. The top field (dimmed)
shows the full path of this Variable in the hierarchy. Click in this field and press the End key to
jump to the end of the text string. Press Home to jump to the beginning. The units of measurement
for this Variable are shown immediately below the full path.

The amplitude, phase (Not Applicable for this direct vibration measurement), and the operating
speed of the machine at the time the sample was collected are shown for each Reference Data sam-
ple.

The Default column shows which sample is tagged as a Plotting default reference (P) or a System
default reference (S). In this example, the last sample in the list is tagged for use as a reference for
both purposes. System Default data is used by Decision Support, if it is installed.

The Label column contains text labels that were entered when the sample was collected.
128 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

To manually enter a Reference Data sample:

1. In any hierarchy, right click on the Variable of interest and select Edit
Reference Data... . The Reference Data Selection window will appear. This
example shows Reference Data for the 1X Variable for a Vibration Point.

Press to
add the new
sample

Manually enter new

sample values here

Manually entering a Reference Data value

2. Enter values for the amplitude and phase, if applicable.

3. Enter text for the label.

4. OPTIONAL. Mark the selected sample as a Plotting default Reference by check-

ing the box below the information you have entered.

5. OPTIONAL. Mark the selected sample as a System default Reference by check-

ing the box.

Application Alert: The System Default data is used by Decision Support

when calculating rule outputs. Be very careful about changing the System
Defaults. If you cause inappropriate data to be stored, you can cause
Decision Support to produce erroneous output.

6. Press the Add button to add this new sample to the list. The new sample will
appear at the end of the list.

7. Press Done to close the window.

 Uploading data from a Snapshot portable data collector 129

To delete a Reference Data sample:

1. In any hierarchy, right click on the Variable of interest and select Edit
Reference Data... . The Reference Data Selection window will appear.

2. Select the sample in the list that you wish to delete, and press Delete. A warning
message will appear.

3. Press Yes to delete the sample.

4. Press Done to close the window.

Uploading data from a Snapshot™ portable data collector

System 1 software collects data continuously from Communications Processors, NetDDE, and
OPC sources. However, there are many areas in a typical plant where networked data acquisition
systems are not physically or economically feasible. There are many assets that do not operate con-
tinuously or are not critical enough to justify continuous monitoring. In many cases, it is sufficient
to inspect or perform measurements on these assets periodically.

System 1 software can create and manage scheduled collection Routes to be sampled using a
Snapshot portable data collector. Snapshot Routes are first created in the Configuration application.
These scheduled routes are based on the Plants, Groups, Trains, Machines, and Points of previous-
ly configured Enterprises.

You can use Display to download a Route from a System 1 Data Acquisition (DAQ) Server to a
Snapshot data collection unit. Once a Route has been downloaded, the Snapshot unit is carried
through the plant for data collection. After data collection is complete, the Snapshot data collection
unit is reconnected to the DAQ server and Display can be used to upload the data. After uploading,
you can view the new data in Display.

To use a Snapshot portable data collector with Display follow this procedure:

Establish communication between the Snapshot unit and your System 1 DAQ
Server:

1. Verify that the DAQ software has been initiated by opening the Data Acquisition
Connection Manager and verifying that the DAQ is running. If it is not, initiate
the DAQ (See Chapter 2). DAQ will communicate to the Snapshot unit via
Microsoft ActiveSync. This program is started automatically by DAQ when your
DAQ server workstation is initiated.
130 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

2. Connect the Snapshot unit to the server using the RS232 serial cable and com-
munication ports.

Download the Route to the Snapshot unit:

1. Launch the Portable Control Manager from Display by selecting

Tools/Portable Control Manager... or by clicking on the Portable Control
Manager icon in the Display window.

The Portable Control Manager icon Portable

in the Display window Control
Manager
icon

The Portable Control Manager window will appear.

Enterprise
name

Preconfigured Routes
in this Enterprise

The Portable Control Manager window

The left pane will show a Snapshot data collector; the right pane shows the
Routes available for this DAQ in the Enterprise name above (in this example, the
Enterprise name is MobiusTech).
 Uploading data from a Snapshot portable data collector 131

2. Update the Snapshot data collector. Right click on the Snapshot Data Collector
icon and select Update Snapshot Status (Refresh). The Snapshot icon will
change and show a battery power indication (green is fully charged), and a hier-
archy will become available showing any Routes that are already loaded into the
collector. Expand the hierarchy by clicking on the “+” sign. In this example, only
the default Off-Tour Route exists.

Snapshot unit
battery level
indicator

Note: if you are using the ac adaptor, the battery icon will be replaced by an ac
power cord icon.

3. OPTIONAL. In the Portable Control Manager window, select

Options/Download Overrides. The Download Overrides window will appear.

Checking the boxes will force the Snapshot unit to delete all existing data or
Route configurations during the coming download. If you have not uploaded the
existing data, checking this option will cause a loss of your data. If your Route
configuration has not changed since the last use, you can save time by not forc-
ing deletion of your Route configuration. Click OK to close the window.
132 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

4. Download the Routes. In the right pane of the Portable Control Manager win-
dow, right click on one or more selected Routes and select Download or drag the
Routes to the Snapshot data collector icon.

Downloading Routes
 Uploading data from a Snapshot portable data collector 133

A message window may appear asking you if you wish to synchronize the time
between your DAQ computer and the Snapshot unit. Click Yes unless you have
a good reason not to. After a short time, a message will appear saying Finished!
Click OK to close the window. The Snapshot data collector icon will now show
the new Routes below it.

Newly
downloaded
Routes

Newly downloaded Routes in the Portable Control Manager window

5. Close the Portable Control Manager window by clicking on Close. The

Snapshot unit is now ready to collect data. To learn how to collect data on tour,
see the Snapshot unit manual or Help: Contents/Snapshot for Windows
CE/Operation.

Note: System 1 software downloads the Management alarm settings for each Point in the Route.
During data collection, any points in an alarm status are indicated immediately on the Snapshot dis-
play. The word [ALARM] appears on the Snapshot data collection screen, and an alarm bell icon
appears next to the item in the Route Tree display. This allows the operator to immediately recog-
nize a problem and take appropriate action without having to first upload the route to the System
1 DAQ computer.
134 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

After data collection, upload the Route data from the Snapshot unit to DAQ and
Display:

1. Reestablish communication between the Snapshot unit and your System 1 DAQ
Server.

2. In Display, launch the Portable Control Manager by selecting Tools/Portable

Control Manager... or by clicking on the Portable Control Manager icon in the
Display window. The Portable Control Manager window will appear.

3. Update the Snapshot data collector by right clicking on the Snapshot Data
Collector icon and selecting Update Snapshot Status (Refresh). The
Snapshot icon will change and show a battery power indication or ac power cord
icon, and the Route hierarchy will become available. Expand the hierarchy by
clicking on the “+” sign.

Routes
containing
data

Routes available for uploading

In this example, two Routes, Refine A Route, and Refine B Route are shown. Each
Route has a folder icon that has some papers showing. The color of the papers
indicates the status of the data:

Color Meaning
White New data exists that has not been uploaded.
Blue This data has been uploaded.
Red exclamation point (!) This Route is not part of this Enterprise.
 Uploading data from a Snapshot portable data collector 135

4. Upload the data from a Route. In the left pane, right click on a Route and select
Upload.

Uploading Routes

A notice saying Uploading... will appear, followed by Finished. Click OK to con-

tinue.

5. Repeat step 4 for each Route you wish to upload.

Note: System 1 software processes data as it is uploaded. Any data that triggers a Management
alarm or Point Status indication on a Route will immediately cause an indication in Display. See
Chapter 5 to learn how to recognize and control alarms and Point Status indications.

For a Snapshot Clipboard Pocket PC, follow the same procedure. Routes are downloaded and
data is uploaded in the same way. Unlike the Snapshot data collector, which automatically col-
lects data when connected to a source, data collection using a Pocket PC is by manual entry only.
136 Chapter 6: Controlling Data Collection

Manual data entry

The Bently Manual Input application (BMI) allows you to input static data into System 1 software
manually for those cases where data cannot be collected any other way. An example would be the
weekly price of fuel that is used by Bently Performance™ to calculate Return on Investment for
an electrical generating station.

The DAQ software will collect all of the data that you enter via the Bently Manual Input applica-
tion, and it will store these sample values in the appropriate historical database for trending. Bently
Manual Input can be configured for up to 100 Points per DAQ Server; these Points can be updat-
ed as often as necessary.

Before using Bently Manual Input, it must be configured and the Points must have been created in
your Enterprise using the Configuration application. Bently Manual Input communicates with
DAQ by way of the NetDDE Data Collector Module. See the System 1 Software Operations Quick
Start Guide, Bently Nevada Part Number 148119-01, for more information or contact your Bently
Nevada Service representative for help.

To enter data using Bently Manual Input:

1. Verify that your System 1 DAQ computer that collects data for the Point is oper-
ating and that the NetDDE DCM is running.

2. Go to the System 1 DAQ Server that collects data for the Points you are inter-
ested in. You must launch Bently Manual Input from that computer.

3. Launch Bently Manual Input. In the Windows menu, select Start/Programs/

Bently Nevada/System 1 Tools/Bently Manual Input. The Bently Manual
Input window will appear.

4. Verify that the Service Status is started. Look at the upper right corner of the BMI
window. You should see a green dot and the word Started.

If you see a red dot and the word Stopped, go to the BMI menu and select
Service/Start Service. The dot should turn green and the word Started should
appear.

5. Enter the data value for the Point in the Value column. Repeat for any other
Points.

6. Press the Apply button. This action finalizes your input and sends the informa-
tion to the System 1 DAQ software.
 Manual data entry 137

7. Close the BMI window by clicking on the “x” in the upper right corner of the
window.

The data will be available almost immediately in Display. If your data value exceeds an alarm set-
point, an alarm will be triggered and produce a color change and blinking. You can handle this
alarm in the same way as any other alarm in System 1. See Chapter 5.

For additional information on Bently Manual Input, select Help in the BMI window, or, in Display,
see Help: Contents/Display Features and Navigation/Display Features/Databases/Bently
Manual Input.

Press Apply
Enter data to send data
value here to System 1 DAQ

The Bently Manual Input window

Chapter 7

Data Plots

System 1 software collects a large amount of data from your Enterprise. To be useful, this data must
be converted into information that you can understand and act on. Data plots are an important way
to do this. In this chapter, you will learn how to locate important data and display it using a vari-
ety of plot formats. You will also learn how to use System 1’s Plot Session and Bargraph Session
Managers to organize and save your plot formats for fast reuse.

See the next page for the contents of this chapter.

140 Chapter 7: Data Plots

In this chapter

Topic Page
Introduction to data plotting in System 1 141
Plot Sessions, Bargraph Sessions, and Plot Groups 143
Setting the Default Data Range for plots 143
Starting a new Plot Session 146
Getting data from a historical event 148
Adding plots to a new Plot Session 149
Other ways to create plots 152
Saving a Plot Session 156
Renaming Plot Groups and Plot Sessions 156
Reopening an existing Plot Session 157
Adding or deleting data in Plot Sessions 158
Understanding the Plot Group window 160
Moving through time 164
Displaying multiple plots in a Plot Group 164
Scaling and more: the Plot Group Configuration window 168
Changing Variables for a curve 177
Compensating plots 178
Overlaying data from different events 181
Formatting lines and plot colors, and controlling visibility 182
Adding notes to a plot 184
Plot shortcuts 186
Sample Filtering 186
Closing Plot Group windows 188
Plot formats in System 1 188
Trend plots 190
Bode and polar plots 192
Shaft Centerline plots 195
X vs Y plots 201
Orbit and timebase plots 203
Half and full spectrum plots 213
Spectrum cascade and waterfall plots 222
Tabular lists 228
Reciprocating plots, rod position plots and Variables 231
Creating reciprocating plots 241
Creating a rod position plot 254
Copying plots and other information 256
Printing plots 256
Custom Bargraph Sessions 259
Customizing the appearance of Bargraphs 262
 Introduction to data plotting in System 1 141

Introduction to data plotting in System 1

System 1 has the capability to produce graphic displays of many different kinds of data in your
Enterprise. Data can be combined from different places, and different types of data can be com-
bined on a single plot. In general, creating a System 1 data plot will require you to answer four
questions:

1. When do I want to look? System 1 allows you to plot data from different times
and to plot data associated with certain types of events. Do you want to see cur-
rent data? Historical data? What part of your historical data do you want to view?
System 1 allows you to locate and display large or small blocks of time; it also
allows you to locate transient data from startup or shutdown events and to pro-
duce a variety of transient data plots. Configuring the time span of your plots is
often the first task in your plotting session.

2. Where do I want to look? Your Enterprise has many, possibly hundreds of Points.
Which of these Points are you interested in? With System 1 you can create a plot
of data from a single Variable from a Point such as a storage tank, multiple plots
of vibration and process data from an entire machine train, or a set of plots of
process or vibration data from large portions of your Enterprise.

3. Which Variable do I want to examine? Which Variables are you interested in?
Direct vibration? A fluid level in a tank? A spectrum of the vibration of a pump?
The efficiency of a compressor? You may be interested in correlating different
types of measurements from different areas of your Enterprise.

4. What plot format do I want to use? There are many different plot formats avail-
able. Some types of Variables, for example, 1X vibration vectors, can be pre-
sented in more than one format (Bode or polar plot). Other Variables can only be
presented one way. To plot your data, you must select a plot type that is compat-
ible with your Variable.
142 Chapter 7: Data Plots

System 1 software provides a large number of plot formats to choose from. Depending on your
needs and the type of data you are interested in, there may be multiple formats available for plot-
ting your data. The following matrix shows what types of data are compatible with different plot
types. Reciprocating plots and Rod Position plots are specialized plot types that are not included in
this matrix; they will be discussed later.

Asynchronous waveform

Direct Max/Min/Average
Synchronous waveform

Process variables***
Variables

Smax amplitude

Spectral band
Rotor Region
Prime Spike

Spectrum**

Custom
Not 1X
Direct

Gap

nX*
1X

2X

Trend

Orbit Timebase

Timebase
System 1 plot formats

Polar

Bode

Shaft Centerline

Spectrum

Cascade

Waterfall

X vs Y

Tabular List

* Phase is only available when n is an integer

** Spectrum Variable from Snapshot Portable Data Collector
*** Temperature, Pressure, Speed, Flow, Inspection, etc.

System 1 Plot and Variable compatibilities

In this matrix, plot formats available in System 1 are listed at the left and Variable names are list-
ed across the top. Locate your Variable and follow the column down; check marks indicate a com-
patible plot format.
 Plot Sessions, Bargraph Sessions, and Plot Groups 143

Plot Sessions, Bargraph Sessions, and Plot Groups

Plots in System 1 are organized in a hierarchical structure. At the highest level, System 1 software
applies the concept of a Plot Session to create and manage your plots. A Plot Session is a group of
plots that are used for some special purpose. For example, you may create a Plot Session that con-
tains Bode plots, polar plots, and full spectrum cascade plots for use in examining startups and
shutdowns of a particular machine train. Or, you may create another Plot Session that contains
many trend plots of current values showing the current state and recent history of your process. Plot
Sessions can be saved for later reuse, enabling you to quickly call up a set of plots with a familiar
format to examine new data. A Plot Session is always associated with a particular Enterprise.

Each Plot Session can contain one or more Plot Groups. A Plot Group is a collection of plots of the
same type (for example, a group of trend plots, a group of Bode plots, etc.). Each Plot Group is dis-
played in a separate window, which may contain one or more individual plots. In addition, in many
cases System 1 allows you to plot more than one Variable on a single plot. The only requirement
is that the Variables you choose must be compatible with the type of plot. For example, you can-
not plot a Direct Variable on a polar plot or a Synchronous Waveform Variable on an average shaft
centerline plot.

Custom Bargraph Sessions are very similar to Plot Sessions; they allow you to create sets of cus-
tom configured bargraphs that can be saved and reused at a later date. Plot Sessions can be con-
figured to examine current or historical data; Bargraph Sessions only display current values.
Bargraphs were discussed in Chapter 5. They provide a fast way to see current values in your hier-
archy. In this chapter you will learn how to create Custom Bargraph Sessions where you can com-
bine data from many different Points and save these configurations for future use.

System 1 allows you to create plots many different ways. You should read through the descrip-
tions that follow, experiment, and decide for yourself what works best for you.

Setting the Default Data Range for plots

If you plan to create more than one Plot Session, start by configuring the default time span that will
be used for all new Plot Sessions. The Default Data Range defines the default range of time to be
used in new Plot Sessions. System 1 allows you to look at current data values, data associated with
transient events such as startups or shutdowns, and historical data from various periods. If you plan
to create many separate groups of plots covering the same period of time, you should consider set-
ting the Default Data Range to your period of interest before you create your first plot. The Default
Data Range will apply to all Enterprises you have open in Display.

Note that the Default Data Range is not the same as the time axis scaling used in some types of
plots (trend plots are the most common example). The Default Data Range defines the time range
of the block of data that System 1 will retrieve from the Historical Database. Any plot scaling will
be set separately and be independent of the data range.
144 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Setting the Default Data Range also allows you to quickly examine plots of data from any part of
your Enterprise on short notice.

Because the Default Data Range applies to all Enterprises in Display, it cannot be set to a specific
historical event because events are associated with particular Enterprises. Because of this, data
ranges associated with events cannot be configured using the Default Data Range; they must be
configured later when you create your plots. We will discuss how to do this below.

To set your Default Data Range:

1. In Display, select Plots/Default Data Range... or Tools/Options... . The

Options window will appear.

Historical data range

between these two dates

Steady state
real-time
data

TDXnet buffer
real-time
data

Select for
historical
data

Historical data
from date to
present

Data display
refresh rates

Setting the Default Data Range

 Setting the Default Data Range for plots 145

2. To view current data values as soon as they arrive, select Current Values. This is
the option to use if you wish to see what is happening now in your Enterprise.
Plots created with this option will display and gradually accumulate current data.

3. During a startup or shutdown, you can view high-density, real-time data from your
TDI or TDXnet Communications Processor by selecting Transient Data. If you are
using a TDXnet, choose between Transient Buffer One or Transient Buffer Two.
For more information on these buffers and their operation, see Help in the Options
window or, in Display, Help: Contents/Startup and Shutdown Transients.

4. To view historical data, select Historical Data.

You have two choices:

a) Select Recent Date Range to view data over a length of time that you define.
The period will always extend to the current date and time. For example, if you
set the default to show the last year, every time you create a new plot, you will
see data extending from the time of plot creation back one year.

b) Select Fixed Date Range to set the period of time to a definite historical peri-
od. Enter values to control the start and end date and time of this period.

5. At the bottom left of the Options window are two controls that allow you to
determine the rate that new current or transient data will be added to your plots.

Set the Static Data Update Rate to control the speed of static data; set the
Dynamic Data Update Rate to control the speed of dynamic data. If System 1
cannot acquire the data at the rate of the setting, it will update the plots as soon
as the data is available. For example the default NetDDE data import rate is one
sample every 4 seconds. Setting the Static Data Update Rate to 1 second will not
make NetDDE data update any faster than 4 seconds.

6. We will discuss the Data Sampling Filtering settings later in this chapter. For
now, leave this feature set to Automated with Type set to Every Nth Sample.

7. Click OK to close the Options window. A message may appear: Would you like
to apply this date range to any active plot session? (NOTE : All open plot groups
from this plot session will be affected by this change). This message applies only
if you have other open Plot Sessions.

Click Yes to apply the changes you have made to all open Plot Sessions. Click No
to apply the changes only to future Plot Sessions.
146 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Starting a new Plot Session

You can start a new Plot Session from the Display menu or from the Plot Session Manager, a hier-
archy that displays all your existing Plot Sessions.

To see the Plot Session Manager:

In the Display menu, select View/Plot Session Manager. The Plot Session
Manager pane will appear in the Display window. You may have to resize the
Display window.

To start a new Plot Session:

1. Right click on the Enterprise name at the top of the Plot Session Manager hier-
archy and select New Plot Session, or in the Display menu select Plots/Plot
Session/New Session. The Plot Session Configuration window will appear.

Enter a name for Enter any additional

this Plot Session information here

The Plot Session Configuration window

 Starting a new Plot Session 147

2. Enter a name for this Plot Session.

3. If you wish, add some notes to yourself or others that can help you remember
important information. Enter these notes in the Job Reference field.

4. Using the Data Source area of this window, set the data range of this Plot
Session. This window is very similar to the Options window used above for set-
ting the Default Data Range, but this window allows you to configure a data
range that is specific only to this Plot Session. If you want to plot data from a
specific historical event, skip to the next section, step 2.

5. Click OK to close the Plot Session Configuration window and apply your selec-
tions. A new, unsaved Plot Session will appear in the Plot Session Manager hier-
archy as an open folder with a floppy disk icon with a diagonal red line through
it.

New Plot Session

This icon is to remind you that your new Plot Session has not been saved.
148 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Getting data from a historical event

The Plot Session Configuration window gives you the option of plotting data from a specific his-
torical event. This can be very useful when you want to view startup or shutdown data that has been
collected by a TDXnet or TDI Communications Processor. Such data is marked as a Transient
Event in System 1. You can also use this feature to examine data that may be associated with a
Protection or Management alarm or with any other System 1 event.

To set the data range for a Plot Session to a particular event:

1. Open the Plot Session Configuration window. In the Plot Session Manager, right
click on your Plot Session icon and select Configure... . Or, select your Plot
Session icon, and go to the Display window menu and select Plots/Plot
Session/Edit Data Range... . The Plot Session Configuration window will
appear.

2. In the Data Source area, select Historical Data, then Event Data.

3. Click on the Get Event button. The Event List window will appear.

The Event List

window
 Adding plots to a new Plot Session 149

This window is actually a special instance of the Event Manager we discussed in

Chapter 5. You can select filters and severity levels to control the event display.

4. Select an event and click OK. The date and time range of the event will be dis-
played in the Event Data field of the Plot Session Configuration window.

5. Click OK to close the Plot Session Configuration window and apply your selec-
tions.

Adding plots to a new Plot Session

Your new Plot Session does not contain any plots. Now you must decide which plot formats to add
to your session. Plot formats are grouped by type, for example, a trend plot group or a polar plot
group. For each plot format, you will add a Plot Group to your Plot Session. After you have added
a Plot Group, you will add specific Variables to your Plot Group.

Each Plot Session can contain many different Plot Groups. Each Plot Group can contain one or
more different plots. For example, you can create a Plot Session that contains a Trend Plot Group
and a Bode Plot Group. Your Trend Plot Group can have several different trend plots, and each
trend plot can plot the (compatible) data from multiple Variables (which can be from different
Points). As we will see, this organizational structure forms a hierarchy that will be partly visible in
your Plot Session Manager.

To add a Plot Group to your Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager, right click on your Plot Session and move your
mouse cursor over New Plot Group. A secondary menu will appear.

2. In the menu, select the plot format you want. The Plot Group Configuration win-
dow will appear.
150 Chapter 7: Data Plots

The Trend Plot Group Configuration window

In this example, the Trend Plot Group was selected.

3. Open the Enterprise (or Instrument) Hierarchy down to the Variable level and
locate the Variable you wish to plot.

4. Using the mouse, drag the Variable into the Plot Group Configuration window
and over the words New Plot. Your cursor will show a “+” sign, indicating that
you can drop the Variable. The words Curve 1 will appear (see figure on oppo-
site page).

Note: Display allows you to drag and drop only Variables that are compatible
with your chosen Plot Group. If you drag a Variable that is incompatible, you will
not see a “+” sign. For example, if you try to drag and drop a Synchronous
Waveform Variable onto a trend plot, nothing will happen because this Variable
is incompatible with this plot format. See the Plot/Variable compatibility matrix
at the beginning of this chapter.
 Adding plots to a new Plot Session 151

Drag

Adding a Variable creates

a new Curve

Adding a Variable to a Plot

Group to create a new curve

5. Repeat the drag and drop procedure for any other Variables you wish to include
in this Plot Group.

Note: You can add additional, compatible Variables to the same plot you created
in the last step, or you can drag and drop a Variable onto a New Plot in the con-
figuration window.

6. Click Apply to see your plots and keep your configuration window open, or click
OK to see your plots and close the configuration window.
152 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Other ways to create plots

We have discussed how to create a Plot Session and add plots to it. This is a good method if you
want to systematically assemble a set of Plot Groups. However, System 1 software also provides
several shortcuts that enable you to launch a Plot Group more quickly. Use these methods when
you need to examine data in your Enterprise on short notice. These methods work best if you set
the Default Data Range before you start creating plots.

System 1 allows you to directly create a new Plot Group from any hierarchy or view. In the
Enterprise Hierarchy or View, you can create a single plot from a single Variable, or you can cre-
ate multiple plots in a single Plot Group from Points, Trains, Buildings, Plants, or even from the
Enterprise level. The higher in the hierarchy you choose, the more Points and Variables will be
included, and the more plots will be included in your Plot Group. You can also launch plots from
any element in the Instrument Hierarchy or View. For example, you can launch a set of plots from
the DDE Server in the Instrument Hierarchy or View; your plots will contain data from all of the
NetDDE Points handled by that server. You can also launch plots from Data Collection Groups.
Also, Bargraphs can usually be launched from the same locations as plots.

When you launch plots using these methods, a new Plot Session and Plot Group will automatical-
ly be created.

You can directly launch a Plot Group many different ways:

From a hierarchy. Right click on the

node, Point, or Variable in the
Enterprise or Instrument Hierarchy
and move your cursor over Plots in
the menu. Select the plot type from
the submenu.
 Other ways to create plots 153

From a view. Right click on a

component, Point, or displayed
Variable in a view and move
your cursor over Plots in the
right click menu. Select the plot
type from the submenu.

From the Display menu. Left

click to select an item in a view
or hierarchy, go to the main
Display menu, and select Plots
and select the plot type.
154 Chapter 7: Data Plots

From a plot icon. Select an item in a

view or hierarchy. Click on a plot icon
at the top of the Display window.

Plot Icons
 Other ways to create plots 155

From a Bargraph. Right click on a

Bargraph, and move your cursor over
Plots. Select the plot type in the submenu.

Note that if you right click near the bottom of a group of bargraphs, you can
launch a set of plots for all Variables in that group that are compatible with your
chosen plot type.

To launch a set of Bargraphs, use the same methods we have discussed for Plot Groups, but select
Bargraph instead of Plots in the menus.

Creating new plots automatically starts a new Plot Session named New Plot Session in the Plot
Session Manager. The new session will have a blinking floppy disk icon, reminding you that you
have not saved your session.
156 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Saving a Plot Session

Plot Sessions can be saved separately from a Plot Group. Newly created Plot Sessions and Plot
Groups that have not been saved can be recognized by a blinking floppy disk icon with a red line.
The blinking notification only appears for new Plot Sessions or Plot Groups that have not been
saved. If you have created or modified a Plot Group, you must save it to prevent loss of your work.

Important: Be sure to save your Plot Groups before you close your plots. If
you close your plots before saving, you will lose your work. You must resave
after making any configuration changes to your plots if you want to keep your
changes.

To save your Plot Session:

In the Plot Session Manager, right click on the floppy disk icon in your Plot
Session and select Save/Plot Session.

There are two ways to save your Plot Group:

1. In the Plot Session Manager, right click on your Plot Session and select
Save/Plot Session and Plot Groups.

2. Right click on your new Plot Group icon and select Save.

You will need to resave your Plot Session and Plot Groups after adding plots or changing any plot
formatting.

Renaming Plot Groups and Plot Sessions

Each Plot Session can have many Plot Groups. New Plot Groups are saved with the name New Plot
Group. To avoid future confusion, you should give your Plot Groups descriptive, easily recogniz-
able names.

To rename a Plot Group:

1. Locate your Plot Session in the Plot Session

Manager Hierarchy.

2. Click on the “+” next to your Plot Session to

expand the hierarchy. Each of the Plot Groups in
this session will appear as a separate icon. The icon
will identify the type of Plot Group.
 Reopening an existing Plot Session 157

3. Right click on a Plot Group icon and select Rename.

4. Enter the new Plot Group name in the field and press Enter.

To rename a Plot Session, you can follow the same procedure, or you can open the Plot Session
Configuration window:

1. In the Plot Session Manager, right click on the Plot Session icon (not the Plot
Group icon), and select Configure... . The Plot Session Configuration window
will appear.

2. Change the name for this Plot Session.

3. If you wish, add some notes to yourself or others that will help you remember
important information. Enter these notes in the Job Reference field.

4. Click OK to close the Plot Session Configuration window.

Reopening an existing Plot Session

Once you have saved a Plot Session, you can use it to quickly reopen a set of plots at any time.
Your session data range settings will apply to the reopened session. For example, if you originally
created a Plot Session with a data range of the preceding one year, the next time you open the ses-
sion, data will be plotted for a period of time extending back one year from the date you reopen the
session.

When you reopen a Plot Session, you have the choice of opening the entire Plot Session, including
all Plot Groups in that session, or only a particular Plot Group.

To reopen an existing Plot Session:

1. Locate your Plot Session in the Plot Session Manager Hierarchy.

2. Double click on the Plot Session icon.

All Plot Groups associated with that session will be opened in separate windows. Also, the icons
in the Plot Session will show an open folder, indicating that plots from this session are open.
158 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To reopen an existing Plot Group:

1. Locate your Plot Session in the Plot Session Manager Hierarchy.

2. Click on the “+” next to your Plot Session to expand the hierarchy. Each of the
Plot Groups in this session will appear as a separate icon. The icon will identify
the type of Plot Group.

3. Double click on the Plot Group you wish to open.

The Plot Group will be opened in a new window. Also, the icon for that Plot Group will show an
open folder, indicating that this Plot Group is open.

Adding or deleting data in Plot Sessions

You can add new Plot Groups to an existing Plot Session at any time. You can also add data to exist-
ing Plot Groups.

To add a new Plot Group to an existing Plot Session:

1. Locate your Plot Session in the Plot Session Manager Hierarchy.

2. Right click on the Plot Session icon, move your cursor over New Plot Group
and select the Plot Group you wish to add. The Plot Group Configuration win-
dow will appear.

3. Drag the Variable you wish to plot into the window and over the words New Plot.

4. Add any additional Variables to the Plot Group, either as additional curves on the
same plot, or as additional new plots.

5. Click OK. Your new Plot Group will appear.

6. Save your Plot Group. Right click on the new Plot Group icon in the Plot Session
Manager, and select Save.

7. Rename your Plot Group.

To add new data to an existing Plot Group:

1. Locate your Plot Group in the Plot Session Manager Hierarchy.

 Adding or deleting data in Plot Sessions 159

2. Right click on the Plot Group icon and select Configure... . The Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

3. In the Plot Group Configuration window, Click on the “+” icons next to the Plot
1, Plot 2, etc. names. Each plot in your group may have multiple curves.

4. Drag and drop a Variable or Point onto the Plot number of your choice, or onto
the New Plot line.

5. Repeat step 4 to add more Variables or Points.

6. Click Apply to display your Plot Group or OK to close the configuration window
and display your plot.

7. Save your Plot Group. Right click on the Plot Group icon in the Plot Session
Manager, and select Save.

To delete a Plot Session or Plot Group:

1. Locate your Plot Session or Plot Group in the Plot Session Manager Hierarchy.

2. Right click on the item and select Delete. The Plot Session or Plot Group will
be deleted.
160 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Understanding the Plot Group window

The Plot Group window presents your data in a particular plot format, for example a trend plot,
Bode plot, or timebase plot. Depending on the existing configuration of your Plot Group, the win-
dow may contain several individual plots. Each plot in your group can have several curves dis-
playing different data.

Transducer
mounting Variable
Box indicates orientation Data
selected curve source

Curve 1 Point and

Train name
Plot
Curve 2 Point and Header
Train name

Selected Boldface
plot displays
data values
Header at cursor
visibility location
controls
Warning
message

Cursors

These arrows
indicate that more
historical data is
available for
viewing. Click to
navigate to the data.

Scroll bar for paging

Page number
Adjust number of
plots per page

The Plot Group window

 Understanding the Plot Group window 161

This figure shows a typical Plot Group. The first visible trend plot contains two curves showing
data from 1X (amplitude and phase) and Direct Variables. The 1X data is plotted with solid lines;
the Direct is plotted only in the amplitude portion with a dashed line. The words Sample Filtering
appear to notify you that Sample Filtering is active and that some of the data has been omitted. We
will discuss Sample Filtering later in this chapter.

Each curve in the plot has a separate header located near the top of the plot. The headers contain
information about the machine train name, the measurement Point, the Variable, the time span of
the displayed information, and whether this data is current, historical, or associated with an event.
Note that, for trend plots, the time span displayed in the header may not be the same as the time
scale displayed on your plot. In all cases, the time span in the header represents the range of data
that has been retrieved from the database.

Both of the Variables on this plot are from the Point BRG04Y, a vibration transducer mounted at
45° Left on the Ethylene Compressor train. The curves show historical data from 6 September,
2001 through the middle of 11 September, 2001.

Immediately to the right of the Point names are two, short, horizontal lines. The lower line has a
box around it. The box indicates that this is the selected curve; because of this, the cursor in the
plot has two small circles resting on the 1X amplitude and phase lines. Also, a small cursor sym-
bol can be seen below the train name for this header.

Click on this line

Box indicates to select other curve
selected curve

Curve 1

Curve 2

Cursor symbol indicates

cursor information
on this line.

Boldface text displays data at the

location of the plot cursor.

Identifying the selected curve

162 Chapter 7: Data Plots

The data values at the cursor location are shown in boldface, and they show the date and time, the
amplitude and phase, and the operating speed when this sample was collected. Clicking on the
small horizontal line in the upper header will select that curve (Variable Direct).

To select another curve on the same plot:

In the header, click on the small horizontal line to the right of the Point name, or

Use the up or down arrow keys to move between curves.

This curve now selected

Data for cursor location

now appears on this line

Selecting another curve

The displayed data now shows the values for that curve at the cursor position (which is close to the
position for the previous curve).
 Understanding the Plot Group window 163

If there are many curves on a plot, the header information can use a large amount of space. You can
reduce or eliminate the header information at the top of the plot.

To reduce the header information:

Click on the left upward-pointing pair of arrows

Header now
partially collapsed

Click here to
re-expand header

Reducing header information

To eliminate the header information:

Click on the upward-pointing pair of arrows with the bar.

Click here to fully

re-expand header
Header now
fully collapsed

Click here to partially

re-expand header

Eliminating header information

Click on the inverted icons to redisplay the header information.

164 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Moving through time

The black, triangular arrows at the bottom right and left of the plot indicate that more data exists
for this plot. You can use these arrows to step forward or backward in time to a different set of data.
For example, you may examine a polar plot that displays a data range that you have specified; how-
ever, outside this range, there may be more data. You can use the black triangular arrows to exam-
ine data outside your defined data range. Clicking on the right arrow will move your forward in
time; the left will move you backward in time. You can also right click on the plot, and use the
menu items Previous Page and Next Page.

Displaying multiple plots in a Plot Group

A horizontal scroll bar is visible at the bottom of the Plot Group window. This bar is used to nav-
igate between separate plots in this Plot Group. Each plot is located on a separate page, and the
current page number is shown immediately to the right of the scroll bar. Clicking on the small but-
tons at the left and right ends of the scroll bar will display the next plot in that direction.

To move to the next plot:

Click on the small button at either the left or right of the scroll bar, or click in the
open space in the scroll bar.

In the example plot on page 160, if we click on the arrow to the right (or in the open space in the
space bar), a new plot appears (opposite page).
 Displaying multiple plots in a Plot Group 165

Second page now displayed

Paging to another plot in the same Plot Group

The Page number at the right of the scroll bar has increased to 2. This is another trend plot with
only one curve, Gap.

You can configure your Plot Group to display multiple plots on one page. The control for this fea-
ture is located at the extreme lower right of the Plot Group window.
166 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To display multiple plots on one page:

1. Click on the button at the extreme lower right of the Plot Group window. A spe-
cial menu will appear.

Click to select
Check mark shows new setting
existing setting
Icons indicate number
of plots per page

Configuring the Plot Group window

to display multiple plots per page

In this menu, the check mark indicates the current display configuration. The Plot
Group window can display one, two, four, or more plots per page, depending on
the type of Plot Group.

2. Click on the menu selection corresponding to the number of plots you want to
display per page.

3. Resize the Plot Group window as appropriate.

In the example on the opposite page, the 1X/Direct plot is displayed with the Gap plot.

If you select more plots than are configured for your group, or if some of the data is invalid (poor
quality), then the words No Data will be displayed where plots would have appeared.
 Displaying multiple plots in a Plot Group 167

A Trend Plot
Group displaying
two plots per page
168 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Scaling and more: the Plot Group Configuration window

System 1 software offers you a large number of display options for your plots. You can choose
between automatic and manual scaling, control line colors and line styles, turn gridlines on or off,
change the way your data is drawn on the plot, control how your cursors behave, fine tune the
appearance of headers, and more.

The Plot Group Configuration window is your tool for accomplishing these tasks. Each Plot Group
can have multiple plots, each of which can have multiple curves. The Plot Group Configuration
window is used to control all plots and curves in a Plot Group.

Plot Groups are specific to a type of plot; for example, you cannot mix polar plots and trend plots
in the same Plot Group. Because of differences in configuration options for different plot types, the
Plot Group Configuration windows for different plot types will have different options in some
areas. However, the general layout and operation is the same for all plot types.

To open the Plot Group Configuration window:

Right click anywhere on your plot and select Configure... .

Selected curve
is highlighted

Plot list
with curves
listed for
each plot

Click here to access Tabs

individual curve
configuration

Plot color
controls Controls number
of plots per page

The Plot Group Configuration window

 Scaling and more: the Plot Group Configuration window 169

This example is from the Trend Plot Group we used earlier. This group contains two trend plots,
one with Direct and 1X curves, and a second with single Gap curve. The plot group structure in the
window has been expanded to show all of the plots and curves of this group.

Several tabs in the Plot Group Configuration window allow you to access different plot scaling and
control features.

The Scaling tab allows you to select automatic or manual scaling, to control plot-dependent scal-
ing features, and to access the manual scale settings:

Click to access
manual plot scaling

Automatic
or manual
scaling

Autoscale Turn on
vertical axis logarithmic
vertical scaling

The Scaling tab

In the Select Scaling area, select Auto Scale Each Plot to have your data plot
automatically scaled, or select Manual Scale Plots if you want to manually scale
the plots.

Some rectangular plots have a Scale to Data area. Checking Vertical Axis will
auto scale the vertical axis only.

Some rectangular plots also give you the option of having a linear or log vertical
scale. Checking Log Vertical will produce a log scale, clearing this box will pro-
duce a linear scale.
170 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To manually scale your plots, click on Edit Manual Scales... . The Manual Scales
window will appear.

Select scaling and

Select scaling and click here to copy...then select another plot and
click here to copy click here to paste scaling
to all plots

List of plots in
this plot group

Amplitude Phase Time

scaling scaling scaling
Gray is Scroll
reference for more
only

Check to autoscale any or all

The Manual Scales window

All of the plots for this Plot Group are listed in this window. To enter or edit your
manual scales, double-click the values you want to change and enter the new val-
ues in the appropriate places.

You can also select any option in the Use Auto Scale area below. Checking any
of these boxes will gray out the field above and automatically scale that param-
eter. Using this feature, you can manually scale only some of the plot character-
istics, and auto scale others.

Use the Copy button at upper left to copy one plot scaling to all others. Use the
Copy and Paste buttons at upper center to select and copy one plot scaling, select
another plot, and copy the scaling to that plot. This can be useful if you have
many plots and only want to copy scaling to a few of them.

Click OK to close the Manual Scales window.

 Scaling and more: the Plot Group Configuration window 171

The View tab allows you to turn on and off gridlines, show setpoints, and control the way the curves
are drawn on the plot:

Turn gridlines on and off by checking the appropriate boxes.

Turn gridlines
on and off

Display alarm setpoint

indicators on plot

Control the way your data is plotted

The View tab

Checking Show Setpoints will add additional lines to your plots showing your
alarm setpoint levels. The setpoints will be plotted with the color that corre-
sponds to the severity configured for the alarm.
172 Chapter 7: Data Plots

The Curve Drawing area controls how curves are drawn on the plot. The default
is Dot to Dot, which draws straight lines that connect data points. These lines can
be at any angle. The Step option draws a horizontal line from the previous point
on the plot until the line arrives above or below the next point. Then, a vertical
connector is drawn. The plot appears as a series of steps.

Dot to dot Step

Dot to dot and Step plotting of the same data

This can be a useful display for clarifying the location of your data points.

The Data tab provides control over what data is presented on your plots:

Check to plot
questionable data

Check to make this

Plot Group date range
the same as the
Plot Session date range

Check to plot additinal

dots that indicate
when events occurred

The Data tab

 Scaling and more: the Plot Group Configuration window 173

System 1 software does not normally plot data that is considered to be of poor
quality. Check Plot Invalid Data to show this data in addition to high quality
data. If invalid data exists on your plot, a message will appear on the plot saying
FLAGGED DATA PLOTTED.

Check Use Plot Session Date Range to force your plot to use the data range that
was defined for this Plot Session. Clear this box to plot data from a date range
defined by your manual scaling. See the description of the Configure Curve but-
ton below.

Clicking on Show Event Data will place large dots on your plot at the locations
where events occurred. Roll your cursor over the event dots; a text line will
appear describing the event. Double click on a dot to launch the Event Manager.

Events shown
by dots

Events indicated on a trend plot

174 Chapter 7: Data Plots

The Synchronize Cursors tab provides many options for cursor display on your plots:

One cursor
per plot

Independent cursors
for each curve

When available,
check here to link cursors
Choose parameter between different Plot Groups
to synchronize on

The Synchronize Cursors tab

In the Show area, select Single Cursor or Multiple Cursor. Single cursor is the
default. Select a curve in the header, then click on a curve in the plot, and a cur-
sor will appear. The Multiple Cursor option will display a cursor for each curve
on a plot independently. First, select the curve in the header, then click on the
curve on the plot. Repeat this process for each curve.

The Synchronize Cursors area allows you to synchronize cursors across different
plots in the same Plot Group, or across different Plot Groups in the same Plot
Session. When you synchronize cursors, positioning the cursor on one plot will
reposition the cursors for all other synchronized plots to the equivalent position.
You can choose to synchronize by sample, by time (the nearest time will be
selected), or by speed (the nearest speed will be selected).

When any of these options are selected, you have the additional option to syn-
chronize across Plot Groups. Check the Inter Plot Group Synchronization box to
activate this feature. You will have to check the same option in one or more other
Plot Groups to make this effective.

Selecting None will disable all cursor synchronization.

 Scaling and more: the Plot Group Configuration window 175

The Header tab allows you to control the appearance of your plot headers:

No plot header,
full header,
or custom header

Check desired items

for custom header

The Header tab

Selecting None will turn off the headers completely.

Selecting Full will display the default headers with all information.

Select User Defined to control what header information to display. Check or

clear any of the User Defined Fields in the list at right.
176 Chapter 7: Data Plots

The Defaults tab allows you to save your plotting configuration to quickly format a new plot at
some later date:

The Defaults tab

To save the current plot settings as a new configuration, select Save As. A new
Configuration name will appear in the list; enter a name or use the default that
appears and press Enter on your keyboard. This will save the current settings for
such things as line types, line colors, manual or auto scaling, etc. However, it will
not save the actual manual scale settings you have used.

To save the current settings as an existing configuration, select a configuration

from the list, and press Save.

To apply a configuration, launch a new plot, open the Plot Group Configuration
window, select the Defaults tab, select the configuration you wish to use, and
press Use. Your new plot will be automatically configured. If manual scaling was
selected, you will have to enter the values for the new plot.

A right pointing arrow in the list points to the current configuration that is used
by default. To change the default, right click on a configuration name and select
Make Default. The next time any plot group is created, this configuration will
be used by default.

You may accidentally save a configuration over the existing System

Configuration. To restore the original system settings, right click on System
Configuration and select Restore System Configuration.

To delete a saved configuration, right click on the configuration and select

Delete.

To rename a configuration, right click on the configuration and select Rename.

Enter the new name and press Enter on your keyboard.

Click on Variables... to change the Variables you want automatically plotted.

 Changing Variables for a curve 177

Changing Variables for a curve

The curve list in the Plot Group Configuration window contains hidden features that allow you to
change the Variable used for a curve, to select compensation, or control visibility of a curve.

To change the Variable associated with a curve:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click on your Plot Group
window and select Configure... .

2. In the plot list, click on the “+” signs to show the list of curves.

3. Click on the Variable name in the curve. A drop down list will appear.

Changing the Variable associated with a curve

This list will show other Variables from this Point that are compatible with the
plot type you have created.

4. Select a Variable in the list. The curve will now plot data from the new selection.
178 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Compensating plots
Compensation is the process of subtracting slow roll vibration data from high speed data (meas-
ured by the same transducer) to remove the effects of electrical and mechanical runout. It is usual-
ly applied to rotating machinery data that has been collected by shaft relative eddy current trans-
ducers. Compensation allows you to remove runout noise so that you can better see the dynamic
response of your machine. In System 1 software, the concept of compensation is extended to sim-
ple static data, where a designated sample can be subtracted from an entire data set.

Vector compensation is the process of subtracting a filtered slow roll vibration vector from higher
speed vector data. Waveform compensation is the process of subtracting a slow roll waveform from
waveforms collected at higher speeds.

To apply compensation you must select the slow roll samples that will be used for each Point and
Variable. There are two ways to do this. You can collect Reference Data during normal operation
of your machinery (this is discussed in Chapter 6), or you can identify particular samples as
Reference Data during your plotting session.

Static data plots allow you to select a sample for compensation and immediately apply it.
Waveform data plots follow a slightly different procedure.

To select a sample and apply compensation during a static data plot session:

1. In the Plot Group window, if multiple curves exist on the same plot, go to the plot
header and select the curve you wish to compensate.

2. Click on the curve and set the plot cursor to the sample you wish to use for com-
pensation. You can move the cursor with arrow keys to refine your choice.

3. Right click on the plot and roll your cursor over Compensation. A new menu
will appear giving you three choices:

a) Select Use Selected Sample to immediately compensate the curve using the
sample at the cursor position.

b) Select Use And Save Selected Sample to immediately compensate the

curve using the sample at the cursor position and save the sample in the
Reference Data list for this Variable (see Chapter 6).

c) Select Use And Save Selected Sample As Default to immediately com-

pensate the curve using the sample at the cursor position, save the sample in the
Reference Data list for this Variable, and identify it as a Plotting Default
Reference (see Chapter 6).
 Compensating plots 179

The plot will change to reflect the compensation.

To select a sample for compensation during a dynamic data plot session (orbit or timebase wave-
form plot):

1. Locate the plot showing the sample you want to use for compensation.

2. Right click on the plot and roll your cursor over Reference Data. A new menu
will appear giving you two choices:

a) Select Save Selected Sample to save this sample in the Reference Data list
for this Variable.

b) Select Save Selected Sample As Default to save this sample in the

Reference Data list for this Variable and identify it as a Plotting Default
Reference (see Chapter 6).

3. To compensate the plot, go to the next discussion.

If a suitable Reference Data sample already exists for compensation, you can apply compensation
from within the Plot Group Configuration window. Using this method will give you more control
over how to perform your compensation.
180 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To compensate a curve from the Plot Group Configuration window:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click on your Plot Group
window and select Configure... .

2. In the plot list, click on the “+” signs to show the list of curves.

3. Click on the curve under Compensation. A drop down menu will appear.

Selecting the compensation method

You have four choices:

a) Select None to remove all compensation from the curve.

b) Select First Sample to use the first data sample in the curve.

c) Select Default Reference Data to use the sample in the Reference Data list
for this Variable that is marked as a Plotting Default Reference.

d) Selecting Select Sample will launch the Reference Data Selection window.
You can select the sample you wish to use and click Done.

4. Click Apply to compensate your plot and keep the configuration window open,
or select OK to finalize your changes and compensate your plot.
 Overlaying data from different events 181

Overlaying data from different events

System 1 software allows you to have multiple curves on a single plot and assign independent data
ranges to the two curves. This lets you create a Bode or polar plot showing startup or shutdown
data from different times. For example, you could compare a recent hot shutdown with one that
occurred a year ago. This technique can be used for Bode, polar, and average shaft centerline plots.

To do this with a Bode plot, create a 1X Bode plot from a Vibration Point by right clicking on the
1X Variable and selecting Plots/Bode.

To create the comparison plot:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click on your Bode Plot
Group window and select Configure... .

2. In the plot list, click on the “+” sign next to Plot 1 to show the curve.

3. Drag the same Variable from the Display hierarchy to Curve 1 and release. A new
curve, Curve 2, will appear.

4. Double click on the first curve, or select the first curve and click on the Configure
Curve button. The Curve Settings window will appear.

The Data Source tab of this window allows you to set the date range for this
curve independent of the range used for other curves or the Plot Session. Initially
for a new Plot Group, the Use Plot Session Date Range box will be checked.

5. Clear the Use Plot Session Date Range box. Select Historical Data, then Event Data.

6. Click Get Event. The Event Manager window will appear.

7. Select the event you wish to plot for Curve 1.

8. Repeat this process for Curve 2. Select another event you wish to compare with
the first event and click OK.

9. Click OK to close the Plot Group Configuration window.

The Bode plot will now show two curves. You can reopen the configuration window and adjust
your scaling if you wish.

You can also use this technique to compare 1X data to 1X compensated data from the same Point.
In this case, you would select the same event for both curves. One curve would be compensated.
182 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Formatting lines and plot colors, and controlling visibility

System 1 software allows you to use different line styles, line colors, cursor colors, and event indi-
cators on your plots. You can also switch individual curves on and off. These effects are controlled
through the configuration of individual curves. You can also change the plot background color and
the plot border color; these effects are controlled at the Plot Group level.

To set line styles and line colors:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click on your Plot Group
window and select Configure... .

2. In the plot list, click on the “+” signs to show the list of curves.

3. Double click on the curve you wish to configure, or select the curve and click on
the Configure Curve button. The Curve Settings window will appear.

4. In the Curve Settings window, click on the Lines tab.

Settings apply to
selected curve only

Set curve color

Curve color
indicator

Cursor color
indicator;
default is black Set cursor color to Set line style
same as curve color

Adjusting line color and line style

 Formatting lines and plot colors, and controlling visibility 183

5. In the Colors area, click on Change Color and select a new color for this curve.

6. If you want your plot cursor to share the same color as your curve, check the Use
Curve Color box. The default color is black when this box is unchecked.

7. In the Style area, select the line style for this curve.

System 1 gives you the option of plotting dots that indicate events for only this curve:

1. In the Curve Settings window, click on the Advanced tab.

2. Check the Show Event Data box to plot large dots on your plot at the locations
where events occurred. These dots will have the same color as your curve color.
Roll your cursor over the event dots; a text line will appear describing the event.

When you are done with your changes, click OK to close the Curve Settings window. This will
return you to the Plot Group Configuration window. Your curve changes will not take effect until
you click on Apply or OK in this window.

To control the visibility of a curve:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click on your Plot Group
window and select Configure... .

2. In the plot list, click on the “+” signs to show the list of curves.

3. Click on your curve in the Active column. A drop down menu will appear.

4. Select Inactive to turn off the display of this curve, or select Active to make it vis-
ible.

5. Select Apply or OK to finalize your change.

184 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To control the plot background colors:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration win-

dow. Right click on your Plot Group win-
dow and select Configure... .

2. In the lower left part of the window, click

Click to set
on the small plot or the color chips below. background
color

3. Select background or plotting area colors.

Click to set
4. Click Apply or OK to see your changes. plot area color

Adding notes to a plot

You can add a note to a plot to provide additional information on a printout.

To add a note to a plot:

1. Right click on your plot and select Add Note. A small note window will appear.

2. Type in the text of your note, click outside the note to finalize.

3. To create a line that points from the note to a part of the plot (an anchor), right
click on the note and select Anchor.

4. Click and drag to reposition the note, or use the corner handles to resize.
 Adding notes to a plot 185

A note

Adding a note to a plot

To change the text and note properties:

1. Right click on the note and select Properties.

2. Click on the Note tab, and adjust your fonts and colors.

3. Click on the Anchors tab, and adjust the style, width, and color of your anchor.

4. Click OK to finalize your choices and close the window.

To delete a note:

Right click on the note and select Delete.

186 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Plot shortcuts
The System 1 Display application has some key and mouse commands that allow you to perform
some plot related tasks quickly.

To quickly adjust the scaling of a plot:

1. In a rectangular plot, hold down the CTRL key and click and drag a bounding box
around an area in the plot. On a polar plot, a scaling circle will appear that is cen-
tered on the origin; on an orbit plot, a square will appear. On cascade and water-
fall plots, a region will appear along the horizontal axis. When you release, the
plot will be automatically rescaled to that size.

2. To reset scaling, press ESC. This will return you to the starting point.

To quickly select another curve on a plot:

Use the up and down arrow keys to move between curves.

Sample Filtering
When creating a plot, a large date range could include a large amount of historical data, possibly
many thousands of samples. Requesting such a large amount of data could produce significant time
delays as the data is extracted from the Historical Database and sent to Display. To improve per-
formance, Display uses Sample Filtering to reduce the amount of data that is plotted at any one
time.

Sample Filtering is a process that limits the displayed data to a maximum of 1000 samples. When
the amount of requested data is less than or equal to 1000 samples, then all requested samples are
displayed with no Sample Filtering. When the number of requested samples is greater than 1000,
then Sample Filtering becomes active, and only 1000 samples will be displayed per page.

Sample Filtering is configured in the Options window where you configure the Default Date
Range.

To configure Sample Filtering:

In the Display menu, select Plots/Default Data Range... . The Options window
will appear. At the bottom right is an area named Data Sampling Filtering
Display.

Sample Filtering works by plotting only every n samples, where n is either automatically or user
defined.
 Sample Filtering 187

Fully
automated

Select
for user
defined
settings

N
Select
choice

Configuring Sample Filtering

If you select Automated Sample Filtering, then System 1 will automatically calculate the value of
n for you by dividing the total number of requested samples by 1000. With this option, your plot
will show the entire date range that you have specified, but not all the data in that range will be
plotted.

If you select User Defined, you can specify the value of n in the range 1 to 10,000. If your value
of n is less than what would have been calculated automatically, then the date range you specify
will be plotted on multiple pages. Each page will display a maximum of 1000 samples. If you
choose n = 1, then every sample will be plotted to a maximum of 1000 samples per page. You will
have to page forward (the black arrows at the bottom corners of your plot) to see additional data in
your requested date range.

For both Automated and User Defined filtering, you can also choose which value is plotted. In the
Type drop down menu, choose one of the following:

Every Nth Sample will plot the actual value of the nth sample.

Maximum will plot the maximum value in the block of n samples.

Minimum will plot the minimum value in the block of n samples.

When Sample Filtering is active, you will see the words Sample Filtering displayed in the upper
left of your plot. This is to warn you that you are not seeing all of the data that exists in the date
range you have selected.

For more information on Sample Filtering, see Help: Contents/Display Plots and
Graphs/Plots/Sample Filtering.
188 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Closing Plot Group windows

A Plot Session can result in a large number of open Plot Group windows. You can close Plot Group
windows individually by clicking on the small “x” in the extreme upper right of the window.

Display also provides a way for you to close all your Plot Group windows quickly. Remember to
save your Plot Group and Plot Session changes before you close your plots!

To close all Plot Group windows in a Plot Session:

1. Locate your Plot Session in the Plot Session Manager Hierarchy.

2. Click on the “–“ sign to the left of your Plot Session.

All Plot Group windows for this session will be closed.

To close all Plot Sessions quickly:

In the Display menu, select Window/Close All.

Plot formats in System 1

System 1 software provides a large number of plot formats to choose from. Up to this point, we
have been discussing general features of plotting in System 1. Now, we are going to look at each
type of plot format.

Plot formats can be divided into two general categories:

Static variable plots display variables that are generally derived from dynamic
transducer signals. Static variables include various kinds of amplitude measure-
ments (peak-to-peak, peak, rms, Smax, spectral band amplitude, etc.), vector
quantities (1X, 2X, and nX amplitude and phase), and gap voltage. Static vari-
ables are considered to be relatively slowly changing and are sampled once on
the order of seconds (although this can vary depending on the variable and situ-
ation). Bargraphs are a special type of plot used to display static data as it arrives.

Dynamic variable plots display either waveform data or continuous transforms

of waveform data. Dynamic variable plots include Orbit and timebase plots,
reciprocating plots, and the spectrum plot family: spectrum, cascade, and water-
fall plots. Dynamic variables represent a waveform that is rapidly changing; they
consist of a series of samples that are closely spaced in time, on the order of mil-
liseconds.
 Plot formats in System 1 189

For the rest of this chapter, we will start with static variable plots: trend plots, Bode and polar plots,
average shaft centerline plots, and X versus Y plots. Then, we will cover dynamic variable plots:
Orbit and timebase plots, spectrum plots, and cascade and waterfall plots. Finally, we will address
some plots designed specifically for reciprocating compressors: reciprocating plots and rod posi-
tion plots. In each section, we will discuss the nature of the plot and any special plotting control
features that are available for your use.
190 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Trend plots
Trend plots display the value of a static Variable versus time in a rectangular format. The Variable
can be a process variable, such as pressure, temperature, flow, etc., or it can be a value derived from
dynamic data, such as 1X amplitude and phase, Not 1X amplitude, or spectral band amplitude.
Trend plots are designed to reveal how a measured parameter changes over relatively long periods
of time.

Trend plots have been used as examples in this chapter already, so much of their use has already
been covered. But there is one additional feature of trend plots that will be mentioned here.

Trend plots can display many Variables on one plot. This allows you to compare different Variables
and see how they change in time.
Variable
names

3 Variables
plotted

Left scale
% Full Scale
Right scale
corresponds
to selected
curve

Features of a multiple trend plot

 Trend plots 191

In this example, three Variables are shown on one trend plot: 1X amplitude and phase, direct vibra-
tion amplitude, and gap voltage. Because the units of measurement of gap (voltage) are not com-
patible with vibration amplitude (mil pp), the left vertical scale of the amplitude trend plot has
switched to units of % Full Scale, where Full Scale refers to the transducer full scale range. With
this scaling, Variables with greatly different units of measurement can be more easily compared.

The right vertical scale of the plot shows the actual units for the curve that has been selected. In
this figure, the 1X curve has been selected, and the right vertical scale shows amplitude in mil pp.
If the Gap curve were selected, the right scale would switch to units of voltage, while the left scale
would remain unchanged.

Because of these changes, the manual amplitude scaling for this plot has also switched to units of
% Full Scale.

These numbers
represent percent (%)

% Full Scale settings on a multiple trend plot

To manually scale the amplitude for this plot, enter a percent value between 0 and 100. In this
example, the scale range has been set to a minimum of 0 % and a maximum of 50 % Full Scale.
192 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Bode and polar plots

Bode and polar plots are designed to plot vibration vector data. Vectors are complex quantities that
contain amplitude and phase data. Vectors are obtained by filtering dynamic waveforms to a par-
ticular frequency; information outside the frequency band is rejected. Most often, waveforms are
filtered to the same frequency as running speed, called 1X for one times running speed. 2X vectors
are also available; these vectors are a result of filtering a waveform to a frequency that is twice run-
ning speed. nX vectors can also be created for any frequency, but for phase data to be meaningful,
n must be an integer.

Bode plots display vector data versus rotor speed using two rectangular plots. The lower plot con-
tains amplitude versus rotor speed (usually in rpm), and the upper plot shows phase versus rotor
speed. Phase is plotted as positive phase lag, which increases in a downward direction. Often,
direct vibration amplitude is added to a Bode plot; because there is no phase data, direct amplitude
is plotted only on the amplitude part of a Bode plot.

A polar plot displays the same information, but in a polar coordinate system. A vector is plotted as
a point where amplitude is represented by the distance from the origin, and positive phase lag is
represented by the angular distance from the 0° mark. This mark is located at the same angular
location as the transducer that made the measurement, and phase lag increases in a direction oppo-
site to rotation. The direction of rotation is shown on a polar plot by a large curved arrow located
outside the plot boundary.
 Bode and polar plots 193

Cursors identify
same sample
in both
formats

Optional
vector drawn
from origin
to cursor location

Bode and polar plots

194 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Bode plots have different configuration options. On the View tab, you can choose between rpm,
Hertz, or radians/second for your horizontal axis units.

Special Bode plot configuration options

Polar plots also have some different configuration options. On the View tab, you can choose to add
labels to your plotted data.

Check to overplot
any configured
acceptance region
alarm setpoints

Check to show a vector

drawn from the origin
to the cursor location

Special polar plot configuration options

In the figure, rpm speed labels have been added. You can also check the Show Vector box. This will
cause a vector to be drawn from the plot origin to the current cursor location. You can also check
Show Acceptance Region to show any acceptance regions that are configured for this Variable.
 Shaft centerline plots 195

Shaft centerline plots

A shaft centerline plot (also called an average shaft centerline plot) is a square plot of time aver-
aged gap voltages from two, perpendicular shaft observing transducers. Shaft centerline plots show
the average position of the shaft centerline over time or speed in the plane formed by the two meas-
urement transducers. Shaft centerline plots automatically convert the gap voltages to engineering
units (usually, mils or µm).

Shaft centerline plots require data from two shaft relative, vibration transducers; for this reason,
two Vibration Points must have been configured as an XY Pair Association.

To create a shaft centerline plot:

Right click on a Gap Variable or a Point, and select Plots/Shaft Centerline.

Gap voltages Coordinates in

relative to Engineering units Date and time
reference value relative to of sample at
reference value cursor position

Points and
Train name

Time period
of this data

Data
warnings

Tic mark
label

Clearance Cursor
boundary (crosshair)
handle Clearance
boundary

Features of the shaft centerline plot

196 Chapter 7: Data Plots

We will discuss several special features that can be configured for shaft centerline plots: the
Reference Sample; the clearance circle position, shape, and size; the scaling; and the type of tic
mark labels.

Shaft centerline plots are always plotted relative to some user-defined position. This position is
defined by a Reference Sample (actually two gap samples, one for each transducer). The shaft cen-
terline curve is plotted by subtracting the Reference Sample from all of the gap samples in the data;
this calculation is a type of compensation. Thus, the scales on the plot axes represent displacement
relative to the Reference Sample. The default for shaft centerline plots is the first sample in the data
range being plotted.

There are two ways to set the Reference Sample.

To set the Reference Sample from the Plot Group Configuration window:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click on the plot and select
Configure... .

2. Open the plot list hierarchy to reveal the curve of interest.

3. Click under Compensation. A menu will appear.

Choosing the reference sample for a Shaft Centerline plot

 Shaft centerline plots 197

The default is First Sample. This is often appropriate when you have startup data
where the first sample was taken while the machine was on slow roll. For shut-
down data, you may wish to define a Reference Sample that was obtained while
the machine was on slow roll after shutdown.

4. Select from one of the choices. If you choose Select Sample, a Reference Data
Selection window will appear showing existing Reference Samples for both
Points.

To set the Reference Sample using a user selected sample:

1. Select a data point on the shaft centerline plot. Right click and move your mouse
over Compensation.

2. Select one of the three choices. Your sample will be used as the Reference
Sample on your plot.

You can also select a point on the plot and save that point as a Reference Sample without applying
it to your plot:

1. Select a data point on the shaft centerline plot. Right click and move your mouse
over Reference Data.

2. Select one of the two choices. Your sample will be saved as a Reference Sample
for the two Variables associated with this plot.

You can now apply the first compensation method and select your newly stored Reference Sample.

When the pair of transducers are mounted close to a fluid-film bearing and the dimensions of the
bearing are known, a clearance boundary can be drawn on the plot. This boundary represents the
approximate clearance that is available to the shaft. It is important to remember that the plot shows
the average position of the shaft; the actual position is the sum of the average position plus any
instantaneous dynamic motion due to vibration. The accuracy of the shaft position relative to the
bearing clearance depends on the distance of the measurement plane from the bearing plane; the
closer, the better.

The clearance boundary is created by drawing a circle of a specified radius (or major and minor
radii, if elliptical) around a center point. The circle or ellipse is drawn relative to your Reference
Sample. You can select whether to draw your boundary with this sample in the center, at the bot-
tom of your boundary, or at the top of the boundary.
198 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Scaling of your plot axes is best done at the same time you configure your clearance boundary.

To configure your clearance boundary and scale your plot:

1. Obtain the nominal diametral clearance for your bearing. For a circular bearing,
this is equal to the bearing diameter minus the shaft diameter. For an elliptical
bearing, calculate the major and minor diametral clearances. The clearance
boundary configuration uses the radius, not the diameter, so you will need to
divide your results by two.

2. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click on the plot and select
Configure... .

3. Click on Edit Manual Scales. The manual scaling window will appear.

4. Check the Show Clearance Boundaries box. This activates the clearance bound-
ary and enables you to enter the boundary parameters.

Plot scale limits Clearance This defines where your

boundary reference sample will plot
radii on your clearance boundary

Check this box to turn on clearance circle boundary

Configuring the clearance boundary for a Shaft Centerline plot

 Shaft centerline plots 199

5. Set your X Radius and Y Radius. For a circular bearing, these will be equal. For
an elliptical bearing with a horizontal major axis, the X Radius will be smaller
than the Y Radius, and vice versa.

6. Double click in the Position column to reveal the menu. Select Center, Top, or
Bottom. This defines where your Reference Sample will appear on your clear-
ance boundary. For startup and shutdown data with good slow roll samples from
a horizontal machine, try Bottom.

7. Set your minimum and maximum X and Y axes.

8. Click OK to close the scaling window.

9. Click Apply to see your clearance boundary without closing the configuration
window. This is recommended because you may not get it right the first time!
Click OK to finalize and close the configuration window.

This figure shows three examples using three different positions for the
Reference Sample Position. Below each plot is a list of the minimum and maxi-
mum X and Y values used to scale each plot.

Position: Center Top Bottom

X Radius 2.5 X Radius 2.5 X Radius 2.5
Y Radius 2.5 Y Radius 2.5 Y Radius 2.5
Min X –5.0 Min X –5.0 Min X –5.0
Max X 5.0 Max X 5.0 Max X 5.0
Min Y –5.0 Min Y –9.5 Min Y 0.5
Max Y 5.0 Max Y 0.5 Max Y 9.5

Shaft Centerline plots of the same data showing different clearance boundary settings and scaling
200 Chapter 7: Data Plots

The clearance boundary has small square handles that allow you to manually resize it. Use your
mouse to click and drag the handles until the boundary looks correct. While you are dragging, the
X and Y radii are displayed. You can make note of them and fine tune the settings in the manual
scaling window.

You may also need to redefine your Reference Sample to make your plot look the way you want it
to.

A tic mark label is a short line of text that identifies a sample. A set of tic mark labels can be con-
figured to show speeds, times, or sample numbers.

To configure tic mark labels on a shaft centerline plot:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click on the plot and select
Configure... .

2. Select the View tab.

Check box
to show
gridlines

Check box
to show
clearance
boundary

Choose the type

of tic mark label

Special configuration features of the Shaft Centerline plot

3. Select the type of tic mark from the Show Tic Mark Labels drop down menu.

4. Click Apply or OK to close the window.

 X vs Y plots 201

X vs Y plots
An X vs Y plot (or simply XY plot) is a rectangular plot that allows you to plot any static Variable
versus (vs) any other static Variable. XY plots are used to discover correlations between different
Variables. For example, you might wish to know if there is a correlation between changes in gap
and direct vibration in a machine running at steady state. Or, you might be interested in the rela-
tionship between compressor inlet temperature and outlet pressure. You can select which Variable
to place on the horizontal axis and which Variable on the vertical axis.

Because XY plots require two Variables for plotting, you must choose which Variables you wish to
use. This is done during the plot configuration process. The first Variable you choose will be asso-
ciated with the X axis, and the second Variable will be associated with the Y axis.

To create an X vs Y plot:

1. Locate the Points and Variables you wish to plot.

2. In the Display menu, select Plots/XvsY. The Plot Group Configuration window
will appear.

3. Drag your first Variable (X axis) from the hierarchy to the words New Plot in the
configuration window. Your cursor will change to a “+” sign, indicating you can
drop the Variable there. A curve line will appear in the list named Curve 1. The
X Point and X Variable columns in the configuration window will show the
names of your Point and Variable.

4. Drag your second Variable (Y axis) from the hierarchy to the words Curve 1 in
the configuration window. The Y Point and Y Variable columns in the configura-
tion window will show the names of your Point and Variable.
202 Chapter 7: Data Plots

5. You can change the Variables in either column by clicking in the X or Y Variable
columns and selecting from the menu. The available listed Variables listed are
from the Point listed in the previous column. Using this technique you can switch
your X and Y Variables or select different Variables.

6. Click OK to close the configuration window.

You can manually scale your X vs Y plot by clicking on the Edit Manual Scales button in the Plot
Configuration window or by right clicking on your plot and selecting Scaling/Edit Manual
Scales.

Data values at
current cursor
location, plot Y
value on top

Points and
Train name

Data
warnings

Features of an X vs Y plot
 Orbit and timebase plots 203

Orbit and timebase plots

Orbit and timebase plots are powerful tools when you need to examine dynamic waveform behav-
ior. Timebase plots present the dynamic change in value of a measured parameter versus time; typ-
ically, timebase plots show how data changes on the order of a millisecond. Timebase plots can be
prepared from data gathered by a fast-responding (dynamic) transducers: dynamic pressure, flow,
position, velocity, acceleration, etc.

An orbit plot is constructed by combining the timebase waveform data from two, coplanar, per-
pendicular, vibration transducers. Most often, these are shaft relative vibration transducers. Thus,
the orbit represents the 2-dimensional, dynamic motion of the shaft centerline. Although it is not
often done, it is possible to combine the signals from two, coplanar, perpendicular, casing- or bear-
ing-mounted velocity or acceleration transducers and display the 2-dimensional motion of the
structure.

It can be useful to display the orbit together with the two timebase plots that are used to construct
it. This type of plot format is called an orbit timebase plot.

System 1 has two plot formats: the timebase plot, and the orbit timebase plot. An orbit plot is cre-
ated by turning off the timebase display on an orbit timebase plot.

Orbit and timebase plots can be filtered, or unfiltered. Filtered plots are actually created from vec-
tors; the filtered orbit and timebase plots are mathematically generated. Unfiltered plots are creat-
ed from waveform data; these plots are sometimes called direct, a common industry term meaning
unfiltered. This can be a source of confusion; System 1 has a Variable called Direct, which repre-
sents the peak-to-peak amplitude of the unfiltered waveform, but the Direct Variable is not used to
create unfiltered orbit and timebase plots. Instead, these plots are created from Synchronous
Waveform or Asynchronous Waveform Variables. Thus, you must keep clear whether you are refer-
ring to an industry convention or to a System 1 software Variable.

Orbit timebase plots must be created using a Synchronous Waveform Variable. For a synchronous
waveform, data collection is triggered by a Keyphasor® event (hence the name: data collection is
synchronized with the Keyphasor event). Synchronous waveform samples are collected over sev-
eral revolutions of the shaft and give good visibility of rotor behavior over time. In addition, the
Keyphasor dots that are displayed on synchronous waveforms give a clear indication on the plot
when each revolution occurs. For this reason, orbit and timebase plots from synchronous wave-
forms are best suited for examining system behavior at rotor related frequencies.

A timebase plot can be constructed from either a Synchronous Waveform Variable or an

Asynchronous Waveform Variable. Asynchronous waveforms are collected primarily for spectral
analysis and have no Keyphasor dots. They are often sampled at high frequency over a relatively
short span of time, often less than one revolution. Because of this, timebase plots from asynchro-
nous waveforms are best suited to the analysis of signals containing high frequency content. A
204 Chapter 7: Data Plots

common application is the analysis of vibration from a machine producing high frequencies, for
example a gearbox. In this case, you could take the asynchronous waveform from a gearbox
mounted accelerometer and compare the timebase plot of the waveform to its spectrum.

To create a timebase plot:

Right click on a Synchronous or Asynchronous Waveform Variable and select

Plots/Timebase. Note that if you right click on a Point, a timebase plot will be
created using the Synchronous Waveform Variable by default.

Sample rate:
number of samples per revolution / number of revolutions sampled

Split cursor parameters

Change in amplitude from reference cursor to this cursor
Frequency span Change in time
contained in this Frequency equivalent of this change in time
waveform
Amplitude of this waveform sample

Point and
Train name Date,
time,
data source,
filtering,
speed during sample

Keyphasor dots
Tic mark mark successive
Rotation
definition shaft revolutions
direction
notice

Features of the timebase plot

 Orbit and timebase plots 205

This example shows several revolutions of data from a Vibration Point. The Keyphasor dots indi-
cate when Keyphasor events occurred; a dot is generated once per revolution of the shaft. Thus, the
vibration signal is dominated by 1X vibration.

This plot shows one waveform sample from a large collection of samples. The scroll bar at the bot-
tom of the window indicates that there are more plots available. Clicking on the scroll bar will
show the next samples.

The plot also shows two cursors. In a timebase plot the cursor can be “split” in this way, allowing
you to find the relative value between two places on the waveform, measure the time difference
between two locations on the waveform, and automatically calculate the frequency associated with
that time difference.

To split the cursor:

1. Locate a place on the waveform where you wish to position the first, or refer-
ence, cursor.

2. Double click on that location.

3. Click on another location on the waveform. A new cursor will appear with a set
of numbers attached.

4. Adjust the location of the second cursor using the left and right arrow keys on
your keyboard.

The numbers on the cursor represent (from top to bottom) the value of the waveform at the posi-
tion of the second cursor relative to the value at the first cursor, the difference in time from the first
cursor to the second, and the frequency associated with that time difference.

In the example, the cursors have been placed over successive Keyphasor dots. The frequency is
11.18 Hz; multiplying by 60 yields the speed of the machine: 671 rpm, which agrees with the speed
shown in the plot header.

To turn off the split cursor, double click on either cursor.

You can also display up to eight timebase plots per page. This allows you to rapidly move through
a large amount of data and study the behavior of your machine (or other plant assets) over time or
during a startup or shutdown.
206 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To display multiple plots per page:

1. Click on the small button at the extreme lower right of the Plot Group window.
A small menu will appear.

Existing
selection

2. Select up to eight plots per page.

The Plot Group window will now show the number of plots you have selected if the data is avail-
able. If data is unavailable, you will see the words No Data displayed. Paging will now be by
groups of whatever multiple you selected. You can resize the window as needed.

Filtered timebase plots are created in System 1 by starting with an unfiltered plot, and then select-
ing a filter frequency in the Plot Group Configuration window.

To create a filtered timebase plot:

1. Create an unfiltered plot from a waveform Variable.

2. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click anywhere on your plot
and select Configure... .

3. Expand the plot list by clicking on the “+” symbol.

4. Click in the Variable column. A drop down menu will appear.

 Orbit and timebase plots 207

Creating a filtered timebase plot

5. Select Filtered 1X or Filtered 2X to change your plot to a filtered plot. Note that
you can also select Asynchronous to select display of the asynchronous wave-
form.

Note: Select Direct to display the Synchronous Waveform Variable. In this con-
text, Direct stands for the unfiltered, synchronous waveform.

6. Click on Apply or OK to finalize your selection.

Compensation of timebase plots is done in the same way discussed in the Compensation section
above.
208 Chapter 7: Data Plots

You can also overlay a waveform from another period of time for comparison. To do this, you must
have selected a Reference Data waveform.

To overlay the reference waveform:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click anywhere on your plot
and select Configure... .

2. Expand the plot list by clicking on the “+” symbol.

3. Click in the extreme right column, Overlay. A drop

down menu will appear.

4. Click on Select Overlay. The Waveform Reference

Selection window will appear. Select a sample from the
list, and click on Done.

5. Click on Apply or OK to finalize your selection.

The View tab in the Plot Group Configuration window has additional options for timebase plots.
You can control which and how many revolutions of data are plotted, you can control paging, and
you can elect to display the signal dc coupled, if that capability is available with your signal.

Unchecked: AC coupled
Checked: DC coupled

Where to start and end

the timebase plot

Special configuration options for timebase plots

 Orbit and timebase plots 209

Use the Revolutions area to control when to start and end plotting of each wave-
form sample.

Check the DC Coupled box to display the waveform with the dc offset included.
This option is not available for all data.

Control your paging by selecting by Plot or by Sample. If you have multiple

timebase curves from different Points in the same Plot Group, selecting by Plot
will display multiple waveforms from the same Point before displaying any
waveforms from another Point. If you select by Sample, waveforms will be dis-
played from all Points for each sample; paging will increment the sample. This
option is useful for comparing waveforms from different Points on a machine
train when all waveforms were sampled at the same time.
210 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To create an orbit timebase plot,

Right click on a Synchronous or Asynchronous Waveform Variable and select

Plots/Orbit Timebase. Note that if you right click on a Point, an orbit timebase
plot will be created using the Synchronous Waveform Variable by default.

Sample rate:
number of samples per revolution / number of revolutions sampled

Amplitudes of these waveform samples

Frequency span
contained in these
waveforms

Points and
Train name
Date,
time,
data source,
Transducer
filtering,
orientations
speed during sample

Tic mark Keyphasor

definition mark (also
Rotation on orbit)
direction
notice

Features of the orbit timebase plot

 Orbit and timebase plots 211

This plot displays the orbit, together with the two waveforms used to construct it. The waveforms
are from an associated pair of Vibration Points. To create an orbit, they must be coplanar and per-
pendicular. Bently Nevada convention is to always plot the Y plot above the X plot. Note that the
Y timebase plot shown here is the same data that was shown in the previous timebase plot exam-
ple.

The same cursor splitting feature is available for the orbit timebase plot. Double click on one of the
timebase plots and move the cursor. The same relative values will appear. In addition, as you move
the cursor on a waveform, a cursor will appear on the other waveform and on the orbit, so you can
see what features on the waveforms are associated with features on the orbit.

To create a filtered orbit timebase plot:

1. Create an unfiltered plot from a waveform Variable.

2. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click anywhere on your plot
and select Configure... .

3. Expand the plot list by clicking on the “+” symbol.

4. Click in the Variable column. A drop down menu will appear.

5. Select Filtered 1X or Filtered 2X to change your plot to a filtered plot. Note that
you can also select Asynchronous to select display of the asynchronous wave-
form.

Note: Select Direct to display the Synchronous Waveform Variable. In this con-
text, Direct stands for the unfiltered, synchronous waveform.

6. Click on Apply or OK to finalize your selection.

212 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To create an orbit only presentation:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click anywhere on your plot
and select Configure... .

2. Select the View tab.

Unchecked: AC coupled
Checked: DC coupled

Where to start and end Clear this box

the orbit and timebase plots to show only Orbit

The orbit timebase View tab

3. Clear the Show Timebase box.

4. Click Apply or OK to finalize your changes.

The orbit plot

 Half and full spectrum plots 213

Half and full spectrum plots

A spectrum plot displays the frequency content of a signal with amplitude on the vertical axis and
frequency on the horizontal axis. Spectra are very useful for identifying specific frequencies in a
complex signal. Once identified, these frequencies can be used to help determine the cause of
vibration.

A conventional spectrum is obtained by taking the waveform from a single transducer and sub-
jecting it to a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). A relatively new development is the full spectrum, a
spectrum that uses the information from two, coplanar, perpendicular transducers. To create a full
spectrum, FFTs are performed on each transducer signal; then the resulting conventional spectra
are passed through a special mathematical transform to produce a single full spectrum. The full
spectrum is usually applied to the analysis of the vibration of rotating shafts in machines with fluid-
film bearings. To help clarify the difference between a conventional and a full spectrum, the con-
ventional spectrum is sometimes referred to as a half spectrum.

It is important to realize that a full spectrum is not simply the two transducer half spectra plotted
side by side; the full spectrum represents something altogether different. A half spectrum represents
the frequency content of a vibrating object’s motion in a straight line (the sensitive axis of the trans-
ducer). The full spectrum represents precession content of the 2-dimensional motion of a shaft in
an unfiltered orbit. Precession is defined as the complicated dynamic motion of the shaft center-
line during its orbital motion; forward precession is motion in the same angular sense as rotation
(clockwise or counterclockwise), while reverse precession is motion in the opposite angular sense.

On a full spectrum, forward precession is plotted on the right half of the plot, with positive pre-
cession frequencies increasing to the right; reverse precession is plotted on the left half, with neg-
ative precession frequencies increasing to the left. The center of the plot represents zero frequency
on a linear horizontal scale, but can have some nonzero value on a log horizontal scale.

Both half and full spectra can be created from either Synchronous or Asynchronous Waveform
Variables. To create a half spectrum, you only need a waveform from one transducer; however, a
full spectrum requires the waveforms from two, coplanar (to be meaningful), perpendicular trans-
ducers, and these transducers must be configured in System 1 as an X Y Pair Association.
214 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To create a half spectrum plot:

Right click on a Synchronous or Asynchronous Waveform Variable, and select

Plots/Spectrum. If you right click on a Point, then a spectrum plot will be cre-
ated from the Synchronous Waveform Variable by default.

Sample rate:
number of samples per revolution / number of revolutions sampled

Frequency span
Number of spectral lines contained in the
and resolution waveform used Amplitude of the waveform sample
(frequency span per line) to generate this used to create this spectrum
spectrum
Type of spectrum

Point and
Train name Speed during sample,
Date, time,
data source
Type of
windowing
function

Features of a half spectrum plot

This figure shows the default half spectrum plot for the Point BRG04Y. This is the spectrum of the
timebase waveform shown earlier in this chapter.
 Half and full spectrum plots 215

To create a full spectrum plot:

1. Create a half spectrum plot.

2. Open the Plot Group Configuration window. Right click anywhere on your plot
and select Configure... .

3. Click on the View tab.

4. Check the Full Spectrum box.

5. Click Apply or OK.

Sample rate:
number of samples per revolution / number of revolutions sampled

Frequency span Amplitudes of the waveform samples

Number of spectral lines contained in the used to create this spectrum
and resolution waveforms used
(frequency span per line) to generate this
spectrum Type of spectrum

Points and
Train name Speed during sample,
Date, time,
data source
Type of
windowing
function

Reverse Forward
precession precession
frequencies frequencies

Features of a full spectrum plot

216 Chapter 7: Data Plots

This example of a full spectrum combines the data from the half spectrum plot above with the other
transducer of the pair. Note that the amplitude of the dominant frequency line in the half spec-
trum plot above has a different amplitude than either frequency line in the full spectrum. The
full spectrum is not just two half spectra displayed side by side.

The cursor of the spectrum plot can be used to identify the frequency of individual spectrum lines.
You can also create labels for lines of interest.

To identify a frequency line:

Click on a spectrum line on the plot. Text will appear under the plot showing the
amplitude and frequency of the current cursor position.

Amplitude and frequency

of spectral lines at cursor position

Identifying the frequency of a

line pair in a full spectrum

To create amplitude and frequency labels on the plot:

1. Position the cursor on a frequency line of interest.

2. Shift right click anywhere in the plot. Labels will appear on the plot next to the
line.

To remove the labels from the plot:

1. Position the cursor on the frequency line.

2. Shift right click anywhere on the plot. The labels will disappear.
 Half and full spectrum plots 217

You can also remove the labels another way:

1. Right click anywhere in the plot, and roll your mouse cursor over Component
Amplitude Peak Labels. A submenu will appear listing the Point names on your
plot.

2. Roll over the Point name you wish. Another submenu will appear. This menu
lists all the labels that are currently displayed on your plot.

Removing frequency line labels from a spectrum plot

3. Select Remove All to remove all labels on your plot, or select an individual label
to remove. The labels will immediately disappear.
218 Chapter 7: Data Plots

System 1 software will automatically calculate and display order labels on your spectrum plot.
Order labels are vertical lines on the spectrum plot that represent multiples (1X, 2X, 3X, etc.) of
any frequency you select. They are most often used to identify multiples of running speed, but you
can use them to identify multiples of any frequency of interest.

To calculate and display order labels:

1. Position your plot cursor on the frequency of interest.

2. Right click anywhere on the plot and select Calculate Orders. A set of order
lines will appear on your plot.

3. With System 1 Version 4.0 and later, an additional dialog box will appear. Select
the order number you want to be associated with the cursor position. For exam-
ple, you might click on a subsynchronous frequency line and define that line to
be 0.45X.

Order lines

Order lines on a full spectrum plot

 Half and full spectrum plots 219

Be careful: The order lines represent orders relative to the frequency you
have selected. The lines will represent orders of running speed only if you
click on the running speed frequency and define that as 1X when you create
the order lines.

To remove order labels:

Right click anywhere in the plot and select Remove Order Labels.

Variable selection, compensation, and overlay options work in spectrum plots the same way as for
orbit timebase plots. Spectrum plots have additional configuration options you can use. All of these
options are accessed in the Plot Group Configuration window.

To open the Plot Group Configuration window:

Right click anywhere on a spectrum plot and select Configure... .

The Scaling tab allows you to select logarithmic vertical or horizontal scales independently and
perform manual scaling of your plots.

Check to produce
logarithmic scaling

Special features of the spectrum plot Scaling tab

Check the Log Vertical or Log Horizontal boxes to activate log scaling for these
axes.

You can rescale by clicking on the Edit Manual Scales... button. Be sure to select
Manual Scale Plots to make your manual scaling settings active.
220 Chapter 7: Data Plots

The View tab allows you to choose different frequency units for the horizontal axis or display lists
of frequency line amplitudes.

Select frequency units

Show alarm setpoints

Check for full spectrum Check to display list

Clear for half spectrum of amplitude peaks

Special features of the spectrum plot View tab

Open the drop down menu in Horizontal Axis Units and select Hertz, CPM
(cycles per minute), or Orders. Selecting Orders will scale by orders of running
speed.

Check the Show Spectral Band Setpoints box to display any setpoints that exist
for this Variable.

Check the Full Spectrum box to display the full spectrum. Clear this box to dis-
play a half spectrum.

Check the Show Amplitude Peaks box to display a list on the plot of the ten fre-
quency lines with the highest amplitudes.

Control your paging by selecting by Plot or by Sample. If you have multiple

spectra from different Points on the same plot, selecting by Plot will display mul-
tiple spectra from the same Point before displaying any spectra from another
Point. If you select by Sample, spectra will be displayed from all Points for each
sample; paging will increment the sample. This option is useful for comparing
spectra from different Points on a machine train when all spectra were sampled
at the same time.
 Half and full spectrum plots 221

The Data tab lets you select different spectrum windowing options, and control the plotting thresh-
old. Windowing is the process of forcing both endpoints of the waveform sample to zero. The FFT
effectively wraps the waveform sample around itself during the computation process, and unequal
endpoints will cause a jump discontinuity that creates noise in the spectrum. The windowing func-
tion forces the endpoints to zero. System 1 software offers you two types of window functions, Flat
Top and Hanning. The Hanning window is considered to be a good compromise for most situations.
You can also choose None as an option.

Select type of Enter lower data cutoff level

windowing function in percent of transducer full scale

Special features of the spectrum plot Data tab

Click on the Window Type drop down menu and select the window type you wish
to use.

The Threshold Value can be used to eliminate the noise floor in your plot. The
value shown has units of % Full Scale of the transducer. Enter a number between
0 and 100. Selecting 1 will cut off all data below 1% of transducer full scale.
Entering 100 will eliminate all your data. Selecting 0 will not cut off any data.
222 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Spectrum cascade and waterfall plots

Spectrum cascade (or simply, cascade) and waterfall plots are 3-dimensional plots that display mul-
tiple spectra. Cascade plots display a series of spectra taken at different speeds; thus the cascade
plot is a transient plot most appropriate for analysis of machine behavior during startup and shut-
down. Waterfall plots display a series of spectra taken at different times; it is a steady state plot
most appropriate for detecting changes in a spectrum over long periods of time or during process
changes.

In both plot formats, all the spectra in the plot are derived from waveforms obtained from the same
transducer (or, in the case of a full spectrum cascade or waterfall, from the same two transducers).

These plots can be constructed from either Synchronous or Asynchronous Waveform Variables, but
in practice, because of the need to concentrate on rotor related frequencies, the cascade plot is usu-
ally constructed from a Synchronous Waveform Variable. Cascade plots are best suited to display-
ing data from startups or shutdowns. You can observe current values, the data coming in from
TDXnet buffers, or you can observe historical data associated with a transient or alarm event.

To construct a spectrum cascade plot:

1. Launch the plot. Right click on a Synchronous Waveform Variable or Point, and
select Plots/Cascade.

2. Decide on the date range of interest. Cascade plots are best used to observe cur-
rent or historical startup or shutdown events.

3. Open the Plot Group Configuration window by right clicking on your plot and
selecting Configure... .

4. Open the Curve Settings window by expanding the plot list and double clicking
on Curve 1.

5. Select the date range of interest. Clear the Use Plot Session Date Range box and
choose your preference. If you want to view data from a historical event, choose
Historical Data, then Event Data; click on Get Event, select an event of interest,
and click OK.

6. Click Apply to see your event on the plot.

7. Manually rescale your plot as necessary.

 Spectrum cascade and waterfall plots 223

Sample rate:
number of samples per revolution / number of revolutions sampled
Number of spectral lines
in each spectrum Type of spectrum

Points and
Train name
Date range
Type of on plot,
windowing data source (event),
function speed at
cursor location

Total frequency
span of the
spectrum at the
cursor location

Resolution
of spectral line
at cursor location

Amplitude and Amplitude and

frequency frequency
of spectral line at of spectral line at
cursor position cursor position

Reverse Forward
precession precession
frequencies frequencies

Important features of a full spectrum cascade plot

This example shows a full spectrum cascade plot of a machine startup that triggered a Protection
alarm. The horizontal axis represents forward and reverse precession frequencies (see Half and full
spectrum plots above for an explanation of the meaning of these terms). The frequencies are dis-
played in units of kcpm (thousands of cycles per minute). The vertical axis at left is running speed,
and the vertical bar at right shows an amplitude scale to be used with the spectral lines. The diag-
onal dashed lines are order lines that identify frequencies that are fixed ratios of running speed.
224 Chapter 7: Data Plots

A waterfall plot can be constructed from either a Synchronous or Asynchronous Variable. Use a
Synchronous Waveform Variable when you are observing frequencies on the order of running
speed. Use an Asynchronous Waveform when you are observing high frequencies. Waterfall plots
are often used to observe data during steady state behavior, but they can also clarify data when a
startup and shutdown exist in the same range of data. With waterfall plots, you can observe current
values or any date range of data you prefer.

To construct a spectrum waterfall plot:

1. Consider the date range you are going to plot. Selecting a span of time that con-
tains a large amount of data may produce a dense plot that takes a long time to
refresh. You can also construct a waterfall plot using current values.

2. Adjust your Default Data Range, if necessary. In the Display menu, select
Plots/Default Data Range... , and select the appropriate range. You can make
any choice, but if you are plotting historical data, consider using the Fixed Date
Range to limit your data.

3. Launch your spectrum waterfall plot. Right click on a waveform Variable and
select Plots/Waterfall.

If you want to view data from an event:

1. Open the Plot Group Configuration window by right clicking on your plot and
selecting Configure... .

2. Open the Curve Settings window by expanding the plot list and double clicking
on Curve 1.

3. Select the date range of interest. Clear the Use Plot Session Date Range box and
choose your preference. If you want to view data from a historical event, choose
Historical Data, then Event Data; click on Get Event, select an event of interest,
and click OK.

4. Click Apply to see your event on the plot.

5. Manually rescale your plot as necessary.

 Spectrum cascade and waterfall plots 225

Sample rate:
number of samples per revolution / number of revolutions sampled
Number of spectral lines
in each spectrum Type of spectrum

Points and
Train name
Date range
Type of on plot,
windowing data source (event),
function date and time at
cursor location

Total frequency
span of the
spectrum at the
cursor location

Resolution
of spectral line
at cursor location

Amplitude and Amplitude and

frequency frequency
of spectral line at of spectral line at
cursor position cursor position

Reverse Forward
precession precession
frequencies frequencies

Important features of a full spectrum waterfall plot

This example shows a full spectrum waterfall plot of vibration data from a historical period of time.
During this time, this machine was running at steady state. The horizontal axis represents forward
and reverse precession frequencies (see Half and full spectrum plots above for an explanation of
the meaning of these terms). The frequencies are displayed in units of kcpm (thousands of cycles
per minute). The plot is skewed slightly to make it easier to see successive lines at the same fre-
quency. The left “vertical” axis shows sample times, and the right vertical axis shows the machine
operating speeds at the sample times. The vertical bar at right shows an amplitude scale to be used
with the spectral lines.
226 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Spectrum cascade and waterfall plots have additional configuration options you can use. These
options are accessed in the Plot Group Configuration window.

To open the Plot Group Configuration window:

Right click anywhere on a spectrum plot and select Configure... .

The View tab allows you to change your horizontal axis units, remove hidden lines, or select a full
spectrum presentation.

Select frequency units

Check to remove
hidden lines

Check for full spectrum

Clear for half spectrum

Special features of the cascade and waterfall plot View tab

Open the drop down menu in Horizontal Axis Units and select Hertz, CPM
(cycles per minute), or Orders. Selecting Orders will scale by orders of running
speed.

Check the Remove Hidden Lines box to change the appearance of your plot.
When this box is unchecked, spectral lines are “transparent” and many, closely
spaced spectrum samples can create a cluttered appearance. When you select the
Remove Hidden Lines option, spectrum samples are treated as solid and obscure
the parts of adjacent spectra that lie immediately behind the spectrum in front.

Check the Full Spectrum box to display the full spectrum cascade or waterfall
plot. Clear this box to display a half spectrum cascade or waterfall.
 Spectrum cascade and waterfall plots 227

The Data tab allows you to control the type of windowing used in your spectra (see the Data tab
discussion in Half and full spectrum plots above for a brief introduction to windowing). It also
allows you to apply speed and direction filters (on the cascade plot) or time filters (on the water-
fall plot).

Check this box to activate this area

Clear this box to

see all your data

Plot spectrum lines

only when speed
increases or decreases

Select How much the speed must change

windowing to plot another spectrum line
function

Special features of the cascade plot Data tab

Check the Use Delta box to apply Delta RPM filtering to your spectrum cascade
plot. Clear this box to see all your data.

In the Delta RPM Settings area, select Increase to view only spectra that were
sampled after a speed increase; select Decrease to view only spectra that were
sampled after a speed decrease. This is a powerful tool if you want to separate
startup and shutdown data when both exist in your data. Select Increase to see
only your startup data or Decrease to see only your shutdown data.

Enter a number between 0 and 1000 in the Delta RPM box. This number sets the
minimum speed change requirement for a new spectrum sample to be plotted; it
is useful for reducing the density of spectrum samples on your plot. For example
if you selected Increase and set a Delta RPM value of 100, then you would see
only startup data samples that differed by at least 100 rpm. Enter 0 to see every
sample, subject to the Increase or Decrease setting choice you have made.
228 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Check this box to activate this area

Clear this box to

see all your data

Select How much the time must change

windowing to plot another spectrum line
function

Special features of the waterfall plot Data tab

Check the Use Delta box to apply Delta Time filtering to your spectrum water-
fall plot. Clear this box to see all your data.

In the Delta Time Settings area, enter a number between 1 and 300 in the Delta
Seconds box. This number represents the minimum time in seconds that must
have elapsed before a new spectrum sample is plotted; it is useful for reducing
the density of spectrum samples on your plot.

Tabular lists
A tabular list is a text list of data that exists for any static Variable. Tabular lists are a type of Plot
Group, and they have the same properties as most System 1 Plot Groups. You can have multiple
tabular lists in a single Plot Group, and that group will be part of a Plot Session. Tabular lists can
also be configured in the same way as plots.

Tabular lists are subject to Sample Filtering in the same way that plots are. If you wish to see all
your samples, set the Sample Filtering to User Defined with n = 1.

To launch a tabular list:

1. Open your Enterprise Hierarchy to the Variable you wish to examine.

2. Right click on the Variable and select Plots/Tabular List.

 Tabular lists 229

Warning notice;
Sample Filtering
has been applied

General information area

Run type is data source

(event, historical, etc.)

Time is date range

of this data

Selected sample can be linked

to cursor location in another plot Scroll down to
see more data

Important features of the tabular list

This example shows a tabular list from Point BRG04Y, and it displays data for the 1X Variable.

You can link a tabular list to another plot. For example, you can create a trend plot of the 1X
Variable (or any other Variable) and a tabular list for the same or different Variable. By synchro-
nizing the cursors, you can see corresponding data values in the two plots. You can extend this con-
cept to multiple plots.
230 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To link a tabular list to another plot:

1. Create one or more plot groups and a tabular list.

2. Right click on the plot and select Configure... .

3. Click on the Synchronize Cursors tab, and select On Sample, On Time, or On

RPM.

4. Check the Inter Plot Group Synchronization box.

5. Click OK.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each plot and for the tabular list.

Now, when you move the cursor in a plot, the tabular list highlighting will move to the associated
sample.
 Reciprocating plots, rod position plots and Variables 231

Reciprocating plots, rod position plots and Variables

Reciprocating plots are designed to display data from reciprocating compressors. You can display
dynamic pressure waveform samples captured from the 3500/77M Cylinder Pressure monitor, seis-
mic waveform samples from the 3500/42M Proximitor®/Seismic monitor, and rod position sam-
ples from the 3500/72M Rod Position monitor.

The Reciprocating Plot Group is actually a family of plots that allow you to display the values of
several dynamic Variables against crank angle, displaced volume, or time. Log-log scales are also
available as an option for display of pressure versus volume (PV) diagrams. The following chart
shows the various combinations that are available.

Pressure*

Force

Vertical axis
Combined force

Acceleration

Velocity

Rod position
System 1 reciprocating plot options

Crank angle

Displaced volume %

Time
Horizontal axis

* A theoretical overlay
can be plotted with this Variable

A reciprocating plot can display 1-dimensional rod position information from either one or two
transducers versus crank angle. The rod position plot is specifically designed to display the 2-
dimensional position of a reciprocating compressor piston rod. This plot takes the dynamic wave-
forms from two, perpendicular eddy current transducers and displays this information in a square
plot format, similar to an orbit; however, unlike an orbit, the rod position plot does not display
Keyphasor dots.

In System 1 software, a Point represents a location where data is collected. In general, Points are
physical transducers or software links to other applications. In reciprocating compressor applica-
tions, many Points are special 3500 monitors that also act as software applications and provide a
number of special Variables (called hardware Variables) to the System 1 platform. System 1 col-
lects this data and performs additional calculations to provide more Variables (software Variables).
232 Chapter 7: Data Plots

3500 Cylinder Pressure Point

3500 Cylinder Pressure Point Variables

3500 Rod Position Point (paired mode)

These Variables
only appear once
per associated pair

3500 Rod Position Point These two Points are associated

paired mode Variables

3500 Rod Position Point (paired mode)

3500 Rod Position Point

paired mode Variables

3500/77M Cylinder Pressure and 3500/72M Rod

Position Points in the Enterprise Hierarchy
 Reciprocating plots, rod position plots and Variables 233

For reciprocating plots, System 1 obtains data from the 3500/77M Cylinder Pressure monitor; rod
position plots require data from the 3500/72M Rod Position monitor. Both of these monitors appear
as special Points in the Enterprise Hierarchy. In addition, reciprocating plots of acceleration or
velocity data require data from a 3500/42M Proximitor/Seismic monitor.

As shown in the figure, the 3500 Cylinder Pressure Point has a large list of Variables. At the bot-
tom of the list are Synchronous and Asynchronous waveform Variables. These are dynamic pres-
sure waveforms, and they are used together with reciprocating compressor configuration informa-
tion to calculate the other Variables in the list. The first eight of these (Discharge Pressure through
Degrees Rod Reversal) are calculated in the 3500/77M monitor; the rest are calculated in System
1. (Not all of these Variables may be enabled on your system.) Except for the two dynamic pres-
sure waveform Variables, all are static Variables which can be monitored using a conventional
trend plot. Note that the way System 1 software handles the reciprocating plot group Variables dif-
fers from other plot types: the Pressure, Force, and Combined Force Variables used in the recipro-
cating plots do not appear in the Variable list under the 3500 Cylinder Pressure Point.

The tables on the following two pages list the 3500 Cylinder Pressure Variables and their meaning.
These are static Variables that can be displayed on a conventional trend plot.
234 Chapter 7: Data Plots

3500/77M Cylinder Pressure monitor hardware Variables

Variable Units Meaning
Discharge Pressure psig or kPag Cylinder Pressure when the piston is at top dead center for
head-end chamber or at bottom dead center for crank-
end chamber.
Suction Pressure psig or kPag Cylinder pressure when the piston is at bottom dead center
for head-end chamber or at top dead center for crank-end
chamber
Maximum Pressure psig or kPag Maximum chamber pressure reached at any time during a
complete revolution of the crankshaft. The value is output
each revolution of the crankshaft.
Minimum Pressure psig or kPag Minimum chamber pressure reached during a complete
revolution of the crankshaft. The value is output each rev-
olution of the crankshaft
Compression Ratio Ratio of absolute discharge pressure divided by absolute
suction pressure. For compressors, the ratio is always
greater than one; for vacuum pumps, the ratio will be less
than one.
Peak Rod Load lb or N Maximum compressive force computed for the piston rod
Compression assembly. The force is a result of the combination of the
inertial forces and the gas loads. Peak rod load is com-
puted from the dynamic pressures and cylinder areas for
each sample during a crankshaft revolution. Gas loads
use the values from one chamber for a single acting, two
chambers for a double acting, and three or four chambers
for a tandem configuration. The load value is calculated
for each revolution of the crankshaft.
Peak Rod Load lb or N Maximum tensile force computed for the piston rod assem-
Tension bly. The force is a combination of the inertial forces and
the gas loads. Peak rod load is computed from the
dynamic pressures and cylinder areas for each sample
during a crankshaft revolution. Gas loads use the values
from one chamber for a single acting, two chambers for a
double acting, and three or four chambers for a tandem
configuration. The load value is calculated for each revo-
lution of the crankshaft.
Rod Reversal degrees Rod reversal is the smaller of two durations of the piston
rod in either compression or tension during a complete
crankshaft revolution. The measurement is in degrees of
crank rotation and has a range of 0 to 180 degrees. See
Help: Search/Rod Reversal for more information.
 Reciprocating plots, rod position plots and Variables 235

3500/77M Cylinder Pressure monitor software Variables

Variable Units Meaning
Discharge Volumetric % The ratio of the volume displaced by the piston during the
Efficiency time the discharge valve is open to the total volume dis-
placed by the piston. See Help: Search/Discharge
Volumetric Efficiency for more information.
Suction Volumetric % The ratio of the volume displaced by the piston during the
Efficiency time the intake valve is open to the total volume dis-
placed by the piston. See Help: Search/Suction
Volumetric Efficiency for more information.
Indicated Horse hp or W The area contained within the pressure-volume curve
Power (work) multiplied by the speed of the compressor. The
indicated horsepower is the total power expended in
compressing the gas and includes such losses as restric-
tions and slippage, but does not include mechanical and
frictional losses.
Theoretical Discharge deg F or C The theoretical temperature of the gas at discharge pres-
Temperature sure based on the isentropic exponent at suction condi-
tions of the gas mixture.
Discharge Capacity mmscfd* or Volume flow rate at the discharge conditions.
m3/hr
Suction Capacity mmscfd* or Volume flow rate based on the suction conditions.
m3/hr
Median Capacity mmscfd* or Average of the suction capacity and the discharge capacity.
m3/hr
Theoretical Median mmscfd* or Average of the suction capacity and the theoretical dis-
Capacity m3/hr charge capacity.
Flow Balance Ratio of suction capacity to discharge capacity
Theoretical Flow Ratio of suction capacity to theoretical discharge capacity.
Balance
Power to Median hp/mmscfd* Ratio of indicated horsepower to median capacity; the
Capacity or W hr/m3 power needed to compress a given amount of gas.
Theoretical Clearance % Volume calculated from the measured location of the suc-
Volume tion-valve-opening-pressure crank angle and compres-
sion ratio.
Discharge Power hp or W The area contained within the pressure-volume curve
Loss above the discharge pressure (work) multiplied by the
speed of the compressor.
Suction Power Loss hp or W The area contained within the pressure-volume curve
below the suction pressure (work) multiplied by the
* mmscfd: millions of standard speed of the compressor.
cubic feet per day
236 Chapter 7: Data Plots

The 3500/72M Rod Position Monitor is a 4 channel monitor that accepts input from shaft relative
eddy current transducers that measure the dynamic position of the reciprocating piston rod during
every compressor cycle. This is useful for determining piston rider band wear and for examining
the dynamic motion of the piston rod. The monitor uses this input to drive Protection alarms; it also
provides waveform data to the System 1 platform. The monitor can be configured in one of four
modes of operation:

Rod Position-Paired. This mode requires two, associated displacement transduc-

ers in a perpendicular arrangement to measure the piston rod movement in the
vertical and horizontal directions. The data from both transducers can be com-
bined to produce a 1-dimensional plot of rod position versus crank angle (in a
reciprocating plot) or a 2-dimensional plot of rod position relative to the bore
center (in a rod position plot).

Rod Position-Single. This mode uses one displacement transducer, typically in

the vertical direction, to measure and display the piston rod movement in that
direction. Rod position can display the movement of the piston rod through a
complete crank revolution. See Help: Search/Rod Position vs. Rod Drop for
more information. The data from a single transducer can be displayed on a recip-
rocating plot, but only 1-dimensional motion can be shown.

Rod Drop. The rod drop mode emulates the 3300/81 Rod Drop monitor. It uses
one displacement transducer, usually in the vertical direction, to measure the pis-
ton rod movement in one direction. The monitor then uses the principle of simi-
lar triangles to extrapolate the piston movement. So, if the rod drop channel dis-
plays 10 mils pp displacement in a reciprocating plot, the piston is estimated to
be moving 10 mils, not the piston rod. See Help: Search/Rod Position vs. Rod
Drop for more information.

Hyper compressor Rod Movement. This mode requires two probes in a perpen-
dicular arrangement to measure the plunger (rod) movement of a hyper com-
pressor in the vertical and horizontal directions through a complete crank revo-
lution. The data from both transducers can be combined to produce a 2-dimen-
sional rod position plot.

Each mode of operation has a different set of Variables, as shown in the following tables. These are
static Variables that can be displayed on a conventional trend plot.
 Reciprocating plots, rod position plots and Variables 237

3500/72M Rod Position Paired Variables (2 transducers)

Variable Meaning
Position Magnitude The maximum distance of the piston rod from the ideal center of the
cylinder bore during a complete crank revolution.
Position Angle The angle from a vertical line that passes through the bore center to a
line from the bore center to the piston rod when the maximum piston
rod distance occurs. The angle is measured in the clockwise (CW)
direction (up is zero degrees) when looking along the piston rod from
the crankshaft toward the cylinders.
Crank Angle Crank angle when the Rod Position Angle occurs. This variable
requires a Keyphasor probe.
Pk - Pk Amplitude The peak-to-peak (pp) displacement of the piston rod over a complete
crank revolution as viewed by a single transducer.
Gap The transducer output voltage that represents the distance from the
face of the measurement transducer to the surface of the piston rod.
The distance is averaged over several seconds.
1X Amp The 1X-filtered amplitude (pp) of the piston rod dynamic displacement.
1X indicates that the complex vibration signal is filtered to the same
frequency as crankshaft rotation speed.
2X Amp The 2X-filtered amplitude (pp) of the piston rod dynamic displacement.
1X indicates that the complex vibration signal is filtered to a frequen-
cy that is twice crankshaft rotation speed.
Not 1X The peak-to-peak amplitude of the piston rod dynamic displacement
with the 1X frequency component subtracted.
238 Chapter 7: Data Plots

3500/72M Rod Position Single Variables (1 transducer)

Variable Meaning
Position Magnitude During a complete crank revolution, the maximum of the distance from
the piston rod to the ideal center of the cylinder bore as measured
along the axis of the displacement transducer.
Position Angle The direction relative to the ideal center of the bore along the measure-
ment transducer axis (which is assumed to be vertical) where the
position magnitude occurs. The angle must be either 0 or 180
degrees, with 0 degrees representing displacement up.
Crank Angle The crank angle when the position magnitude occurs. This variable
requires a Keyphasor probe.
Pk - Pk Amplitude The peak-to-peak (pp) displacement of the piston rod over a complete
crank revolution.
Gap The transducer output voltage that represents the distance from the
face of the measurement transducer to the surface of the piston rod.
The distance is averaged over several seconds.
1X Amp The 1X-filtered amplitude (pp) of the piston rod dynamic displacement.
1X indicates that the complex vibration signal is filtered to the same
frequency as crankshaft rotation speed.
2X Amp The 2X-filtered amplitude (pp) of the piston rod dynamic displacement.
1X indicates that the complex vibration signal is filtered to a frequen-
cy that is twice crankshaft rotation speed.
Not 1X The peak-to-peak amplitude of the piston rod dynamic displacement
with the 1X frequency component subtracted.
 Reciprocating plots, rod position plots and Variables 239

3500/72M Rod Drop Variables (1 transducer)

Variable Meaning
Average Piston The time average over a complete crank revolution of the piston posi-
Position tion relative to a reference value and along the axis of the measure-
ment transducer (usually assumed to be vertical). The rod average
position measurement observed by the probe is extrapolated to the
piston using the location of the probe and the principle of similar trian-
gles. This measurement is used to estimate rider band wear at the
piston.
Average Probe Gap The transducer output voltage that represents the distance from the
face of the measurement transducer to the surface of the piston rod.
The distance is averaged over several seconds.
Instantaneous Piston The instantaneous value of the extrapolated piston position, relative to
Position an arbitrary reference location, collected when the crankshaft rotates
through a trigger angle. This Variable requires a Keyphasor probe.
Instantaneous Probe The instantaneous position value of the probe taken at the trigger angle
Gap and then averaged over several seconds. This Variable requires a
Keyphasor probe.
240 Chapter 7: Data Plots

3500/72M Hyper Compressor Rod Variables (2 transducers)

Variable Meaning
Pk - Pk Displacement The peak-to-peak displacement (pp) of the piston rod over a complete
crank revolution as viewed by a single transducer.
Gap The transducer output voltage that represents the distance from the
face of the measurement transducer to the surface of the piston rod.
The distance is averaged over several seconds.
1X Amplitude The 1X-filtered amplitude (pp) of the piston rod dynamic displacement.
1X indicates that the complex vibration signal is filtered to the same
frequency as crankshaft rotation speed.
2X Amp The 2X-filtered amplitude (pp) of the piston rod dynamic displacement.
1X indicates that the complex vibration signal is filtered to a frequen-
cy that is twice crankshaft rotation speed.
Not 1X The peak-to-peak amplitude of the piston rod dynamic displacement
with the 1X frequency component subtracted.
 Creating reciprocating plots 241

Creating reciprocating plots

Like any System 1 software plot, reciprocating plots can be launched from many different levels
in the Enterprise Hierarchy. The level you choose will affect how much information will be dis-
played in your plot group. You may find it best to limit the amount of information by launching
your plot from the lowest level of the Enterprise. In the following discussion, we will show you
how to do this. As you gain experience managing these plots, you can experiment with launching
plot groups from higher levels.

To launch a reciprocating plot:

1. Open the Enterprise Hierarchy to a 3500 Cylinder Pressure Point.

2. Right click on the Point and select Plots/Reciprocating. A plot group will
appear (next page).
242 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Pressure and
Top dead center crank angle
at cursor location
3500 Rod Position
Point name Date and time Speed during
Data source
of this sample this sample

Important features of a reciprocating plot

This example shows the reciprocating plot from a reciprocating compressor crank end chamber; it
is a plot of dynamic crank end cylinder pressure versus crank angle. Note that zero degrees on the
horizontal axis corresponds to top dead center (TDC), the position where the crank is closest to the
cylinder.
 Creating reciprocating plots 243

Like timebase plots, reciprocating plots are waveform plots, where successive waveforms in a his-
torical sequence are plotted on different pages. You can page to additional samples by using the
horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the plot group window.

You can add an overlay to this pressure plot that shows either theoretical pressure behavior or a his-
torical reference sample. You can use this to compare your current performance to the reference
behavior. You can add a theoretical overlay at any time, but to add a reference sample, you must
have already defined a Waveform Reference sample for the Waveform Variable for this Point.

To add a reference overlay to your plot:

1. Right click anywhere on your plot and select Configure... . The Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

2. Expand the plot list under Plot 1 to reveal Curve 1. This curve represents your
current reciprocating plot curve.

3. Select Theoretical Pressure to add a theoretical overlay, or Select Overlay to add

a reference sample.

Adding an overlay to a reciprocating plot

4. Click on Apply or OK.

244 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Theoretical
behavior

Measured
behavior

Reciprocating plot with theoretical overlay

This figure shows a theoretical overlay on the same plot we created on the previous page. This
overlay acts like any other plot curve; you can select it in the plot header and use the cursor to iden-
tify values.

This plot was created using data from the crank end. To add the curve from the head end of this
throw:

1. Right click anywhere on your plot and select Configure... . The Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

2. Expand the plot list under Plot 1 to reveal Curve 1. This curve represents your
current reciprocating plot curve.
 Creating reciprocating plots 245

Selecting Combined Force displays information about the forces due to the combination of all the
pressure and inertial forces acting on a particular throw. These combined forces include contribu-
tions from all the cylinders on that throw (for example, both head end and crank end) together with
the inertial effects of the pistons, rod, and (optionally) the crosshead. The 3500 Cylinder Pressure
Point can be configured to calculate the combined force at either the crosshead pin (including the
the inertia of the crosshead) or at the piston rod where the rod connects to the crosshead pin
(excluding the inertia of the crosshead).

To see how your Point is configured you must have the System 1 Configuration application
installed on the same computer that is running Display and you must have the View Software
Configuration User Right. Then:

1. Right click on the 3500 Cylinder Pressure Point and select Properties... .

2. Select the Composite Variables tab.

3. Look at the box to the right of Rod Load Location. This box will display either
At Crosshead Pin (crosshead pin inertia included) or At Piston Rod (crosshead
pin inertia excluded).

The plot will display three curves:

The force is a waveform of the calculated force due to the instantaneous gas pres-
sure that acts on the piston. It is calculated using the dynamic pressure waveform
and the cylinder area.

The inertial force is the calculated force due to the accelerating mass of the pis-
ton.

The combined force is the sum of the gas pressure force and the inertial force.
This represents the net force that acts on the piston rod at the location of the piston.
246 Chapter 7: Data Plots

3. Drag the Point representing the head end measurement into the Plot Group
Configuration window to a position over the words Curve 1. A “+” sign will
appear indicating you are about to add another curve. When you release your
mouse, the words Curve 2 will appear.

4. Add a theoretical curve for this curve if you wish.

5. Click Apply or OK.

The plot will now display cylinder pressure data from both the head and crank end chambers of this
throw.

The reciprocating plot also has other data options (see the diagram at the beginning of the previ-
ous section). You can plot pressure, force, or combined force against crank angle, displaced vol-
ume, or time. You can also create logarithmically-scaled PV diagrams.

These plotting options are controlled inside the Plot Group Configuration window.

Configuring different Variables for a reciprocating plot

Use the two drop down menus in this window to control which parameters are plotted on your
reciprocating plot.
 Creating reciprocating plots 247

Force and
crank angle
at cursor location

Inertial
force

Gas
force

Combined
force

Combined Force display on a reciprocating plot

In these curves, positive is in the direction away from the piston face. Thus, the force due to gas
pressure is negative when compression gas pressures are highest. Note that plots of combined force
can only be displayed for data from one Point.
248 Chapter 7: Data Plots

You can display a plot of pressure versus volume, a PV diagram. In the Plot Group Configuration
window, select Pressure for the Vertical Value and Displaced Volume for the Horizontal Value.
When you apply your selections, a PV diagram will be produced.

The example on the opposite page shows the PV diagram for both the crank and head ends. Note
that the head end plot is displayed backwards. This is by industry convention and keeps the data
separated for easier analysis.
 Creating reciprocating plots 249

Pressure
and displaced volume
at cursor location

Head Crank
end end

A PV diagram on a reciprocating plot

250 Chapter 7: Data Plots

If you have a 3500 Rod Position-Single Point configured, you can display 1-dimensional rod posi-
tion data on a reciprocating plot. This allows you to observe changes in rod position with crank
angle.

To display rod position data on a new reciprocating plot:

Right click on a 3500 Rod Position Point, and select Plots/Reciprocating.

You can also add a plot to an existing reciprocating plot group. The units of measurement are not
compatible with other reciprocating plot data, so you must create another plot within the same plot
group.

To add a rod position plot to an existing reciprocating plot group:

1. Right click anywhere on your existing plot and select Configure... . The Plot
Group Configuration window will appear.

2. Drag the 3500 Rod Position Point from the Enterprise Hierarchy into the Plot
Group Configuration window to a position over the words New Plot. A “+” sign
will appear indicating you are about to create a new plot. When you release your
mouse, the new plot designation will appear.

3. Click on the View tab. In the Paging area, select by Sample. This will force the
plot window to display all the configured plots for the same sample simultane-
ously.

4. Click OK to close the Plot Group Configuration window.

5. At the bottom right of the plot group window, open the drop down menu and
select a multiple plot display.
 Creating reciprocating plots 251

Position relative to bore center

Gap voltage and crank angle
3500 Rod Position corresponding at cursor location
Point name to bore center

Rod position display on a reciprocating plot

The rod position display looks similar to a timebase plot. In this case, the horizontal axis is crank
angle, and the vertical axis is the distance of the piston rod from the bore center as viewed along
the line of the transducer sensitive axis.
252 Chapter 7: Data Plots

If you have a 3500 Rod Position-Paired Point configured, you can display rod position magnitude
versus crank angle on a reciprocating plot.

Important: Paired position data on a reciprocating plot must be displayed in

a separate Reciprocating Plot Group. You cannot combine paired position
data with other data in the same plot group.

To display paired rod position data on a reciprocating plot:

1. Right click on a 3500 Rod Position Point, and select Plots/Reciprocating. A

reciprocating plot will appear that displays data from one transducer by default.

2. Right click anywhere on your existing plot and select Configure... . The Plot
Group Configuration window will appear.

3. Select the View tab.

4. Check the Rod Position Pair box.

5. Click OK to close the Plot Group Configuration window.

 Creating reciprocating plots 253

2-dimensional position
(distance relative to bore center)
Gap voltages and crank angle
3500 Rod Position corresponding at cursor location
Paired Point name to bore center

A reciprocating plot showing Rod Position-Paired data. The plot

shows the instantaneous distance of the rod from the bore center.
254 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Creating a rod position plot

Rod position plots can be launched from many different levels in the Enterprise Hierarchy. You can
even create a set of rod position plots for every reciprocating compressor in your Enterprise. The
rod position plot is a 2-dimensional plot, similar to an orbit, that is created from the data from two,
associated 3500 Rod Position Points. The monitor channels receive data from two, perpendicular
rod observing probes. Also, the Points must have been configured in either the Rod Position Paired
or Hyper Compressor Rod mode.

To launch a rod position plot:

1. Open the Enterprise Hierarchy to a 3500 Rod Position Point.

2. Right click on the Point and select Plots/Rod Position. A plot group will appear
(opposite page).

This plot shows the distance of the piston rod from the bore center. In this example, the rod aver-
ages nearly 11 mils above (left scale) and slightly to the right of the bore center. The scale at the
very bottom represents crank angle. You can move the cursor with the mouse or by using the arrow
keys on your keyboard, and the cursor in the plot will move; the crank angle corresponding to the
cursor location is shown at the bottom. The amplitude and phase angle number at the top right of
the plot header represents the Position Magnitude and Position Angle of the rod at the location of
the cursor. The Position Angle is measured clockwise (CW) from vertical up.
 Creating a rod position plot 255

X and Y position
Gap voltages at cursor location
corresponding relative to bore center
Date and time to bore center Position Magnitude
of this data and Postion Angle
at cursor location

Point
names
Source of
this data

Speed during
this data sample

Cursor
(crosshair)

Crank angle
indicator
(set at 0)

Important features of a rod position plot

256 Chapter 7: Data Plots

Copying plots and other information

The System 1 Display application allows you to copy any part of the Display window or all or part
of your data plot and paste them into other applications. This can be useful for creating reports in
an application such as Microsoft Word. Plots are copied and pasted as bitmap images. Using this
feature, you can also document all or part your Enterprise or Instrument Hierarchy, your Plot and
Bargraph Session Hierarchies, or your Collection Group Hierarchy. The copying process involves
defining a bounding box that defines the area to be copied. That bounding box can include any part
of the Display window or any part of a plot window.

To paste a copy of a plot or part of a hierarchy into another application:

1. In the Display menu, select Edit/Copy Screen Area. The cursor will immedi-
ately change into a crosshair shape.

2. Start at the upper left corner of the area you want to copy. Click and drag the
mouse cursor to define a rectangular bounding box. This box will appear on
screen with dashed lines.

3. Release the mouse at the lower right corner of the area you wish to copy. When
you release the mouse, the area will be immediately copied.

4. Switch to your other application, and paste the image into your application.

Printing plots
You can print your plots to provide permanent hard copy records. There are three basic printing
options that control the number and organization of your printout:

The Active Plot is a single plot that you have selected with the mouse. Even if
several plots are visible on a page, only the selected plot will be printed.

The Active Plot Page is the currently visible page in your plot group. This page
may contain one plot or up to eight plots, depending on your current plot group
configuration. All plots on the page will be printed on one page in the printer.

The Active Plot Group is the entire plot group that you have configured. This can
range from a single plot on one page, to potentially hundreds of pages, each con-
taining multiple plots. Do not select this option without carefully considering
how big your print job will be. A very large plot group could require hundreds
of pages of printing and take a considerable amount of time to print.
 Printing plots 257

Before you print your job, think about whether to use Portrait or Landscape orientation. Portrait
orientation produces a printout where up is along the long dimension of the paper; landscape has
horizontal along the long dimension. Some orientations are better suited to certain plot formats than
others, and your choice may change depending on how many plots per page you will print. Here
are some suggestions:

Single polar plots should be printed portrait, but two polar plots should be print-
ed landscape.

Single spectrum plots usually work best when printed landscape.

Spectrum cascade or waterfall plots should be printed landscape.

A single orbit should be printed portrait, but a single orbit timebase plot should
be printed landscape.

Single or multiple trend or Bode plots are often best printed landscape.
258 Chapter 7: Data Plots

To print your plots:

1. If you want to print only one plot that is part of a larger group, select that plot by
clicking anywhere in it.

2. Right click on your plot and select Print... , or go to the Display menu and select
Enterprise/Print... . The Print Options window will appear.
Check to control
printing of these items

Select
which plots
to print
Setting
plot printing
options
Number of
comment lines
to print

Left, right, top, bottom

margin sizes
on page

3. In the Select what To Print area, select Active Plot, Active Page, or Active Plot
Group. Do not select the Group option without carefully considering how big
your print job will be. A very large plot group could require hundreds of pages
of printing and take a considerable amount of time to print.

4. Select the Options To Print on a page. You can select to include or exclude any
of these by checking the appropriate box. If you check the Comments box, you
can also choose how many lines of comments to print below your plot.

5. Adjust your margins if you wish. Enter numeric values (in inches) for left, right,
top, and bottom margins. Your printout will be scaled to fit within these margins.

6. Click on the Printer Setup button to access your printer settings and choose
between portrait or landscape orientation.

7. Click OK to start your print job.

 Custom Bargraph Sessions 259

Note that you can also print Event Manager lists, Help topics, and Journal Entries. Printing of these
items is accessed through the Display menu (Enterprise/Print...).

Custom Bargraph Sessions

A Bargraph Session is the Bargraph equivalent of a Plot Session. Bargraph sessions are built by
adding Custom Bargraphs to newly created Bargraph Sessions. There are two methods available
for creating customized bargraphs: create a new Custom Bargraph in the Bargraph Session
Manager, or modify an already open bargraph as needed and then save it as a Custom Bargraph.
No matter which way you create your custom bargraph, it will be available from the Bargraph
Session Manager once it is saved.

You can start a new Bargraph Session from the Display menu or from the Bargraph Session
Manager, a hierarchy that displays all your existing Bargraph Sessions.

To see the Bargraph Session Manager:

In the Display menu, select View/Bargraph Session Manager. The Bargraph

Session Manager pane will appear in the Display window. You may have to
resize the Display window.

There are three ways to start a new Bargraph Session:

Right click on the Enterprise name at the top of the Bargraph Session Manager
hierarchy and select New Custom Bargraph. A new Bargraph Session icon will
appear in the hierarchy. It will have the default name Custom BG1 (for the first
one) followed by the date it was created.

or

In the Display menu, select Plots/Custom Bargraph. A new, empty Bargraph

Session window will appear, displaying the message No points available. This
means that there are no Points currently configured for this session. They will be
added shortly.

or

Right click on any node in the Enterprise or Instrument Hierarchy and select
Bargraph. This will immediately display a new Bargraph Session with all of the
Bargraphs that exist at or below the selected node.
260 Chapter 7: Data Plots

You must now add Points to your new Custom Bargraph Session. You can add a mix of Points from
any location in your Enterprise.

To add Points to your Bargraph Session:

1. Drag a Point from the Enterprise or Instrument Hierarchy over to your Bargraph
Session icon (if you used the first method above) or into your Bargraph Session
window (if you used the second method). A “+” sign will appear. Release your
mouse to add the Point. A “+” sign will also appear to the left of your session
icon, indicating that items now exist in the Bargraph Session Hierarchy below
your session. Note: you can drag any higher node in the hierarchy, and all
Points at or below that node will automatically be added to your Bargraph
Session. Use this feature to create Bargraphs showing data from an entire
machine train or building.

2. Repeat this procedure for any other Points you wish to add.

3. Expand your Bargraph Session Hierarchy to view the Points and Variables that
exist in this Bargraph Session. Click on the “+” to the left of your Bargraph
Session icon.

Custom Bargraph Session

Points and Variables in this session

A Bargraph Session in the

Bargraph Session Manager

In this example, the Custom Bargraph Session has the default name and contains two Points,
BRG04Y and BRG04X, each of which has three Variables.
 Custom Bargraph Sessions 261

To launch your Bargraphs from the Bargraph session hierarchy icon:

In the Bargraph Session Manager window, right click on your Bargraph Session icon and select
Show Custom Bargraph.

Custom Bargraph Session name

Point name
Variable names

Alarm
settings
No data available

Status indication

A Custom Bargraph Session

To rename your Bargraph Session:

Right click on the session and select Rename. Enter the new name and press the
Enter key on your keyboard.

You must save your new Bargraph session to keep it available for use in the future. System 1
Display alerts you to any unsaved sessions by displaying a blinking icon in the Bargraph Session
Hierarchy. The icon changes back and forth from a bargraph symbol to a red floppy disk icon.

To save your Bargraph Session:

Right click on any open Bargraph and select Save Custom Bargraph. The
blinking floppy disk icon will disappear.
262 Chapter 7: Data Plots

You can move Bargraphs around in the Bargraph Session window. This allows you to organize the
appearance of your session to meet your particular needs. Just click and drag a group of Bargraphs
to a new position in the window.

Be sure to save your session after you make any changes.

Customizing the appearance of Bargraphs

You can control Bargraph size, appearance, color, font, and what default Variables are displayed in
Bargraphs. These are “global” properties that are applied to all present and future Bargraph ses-
sions.

To customize your Bargraphs:

1. In the Display window, select Plots/Bargraph Preferences... . The Bargraph

Preference window appears.

Bargraph
display font

Number of tics
Bargraph on Bargraph scale
screen size

Bargraph
border
appearance

Reset to
default

Adjusting Bargraph dimensions, font, and tic marks

 Customizing the appearance of Bargraphs 263

2. Use the General tab to adjust the bar width and height, the appearance of the
Bargraph border, the font used for text and numerals, and the number of tic marks
on the bargraph scales. Click on Use Default to restore the factory default set-
tings.

Normal
Bargraph
color scheme

Appearance
preview

Selected
Bargraph
color scheme

Reset to
default

Adjusting Bargraph colors

3. Use the Color tab and the settings in the Bar area to adjust the normal Bargraph
background, text, and tic colors. The Selected Bar area controls the appearance
of selected and highlighted Bargraphs. The Use Default button resets to factory
default settings.
 Select Click here New Variables
Variables to add will appear here

Controlling the default Variables displayed in Bargraphs

4. Use the Variables tab to control which Variables are always displayed on
Bargraphs by default. No matter what you choose, only those Variables that are
compatible with the Point will actually be displayed.

To add a Variable to the default list, select the Variable name in the All list on the
left, and click on the “>>” button to add it to the Selected list on the right.

To remove a Variable, select the Variable name in the Selected list, and click on
the “<<” button.

The Add All and Remove All will operate on all the listed Variables at once.
Chapter 8

Getting The Most From Your

System 1™ Software

The previous chapters have concentrated on operational features of the System 1 software platform.
In this chapter you will learn how to apply these features to manage and present the large amount
of information that is available to you. You will learn how to set up your software to find the infor-
mation you need, and you will learn how to configure your Plot Sessions so that you can find the
same information much more quickly next time.

A good way to use this chapter is to go to the topic below that most closely matches your situation.
It is also a good idea to read through the entire chapter; this will give you a good overview of how
the System 1 platform can be used to enhance your day-to-day operations and productivity.

In this chapter

Topic Page
Introduction 266
I see blinking colors. What do they mean and what do I do? 266
How do I determine what is going on now? 268
How do I determine how my Enterprise behaved in the past? 272
How do I compare today’s behavior with yesterday’s? 275
How do I view data along a machine train? 280
How do I correlate data from different sources? 282
How do I find and look at my startup or shutdown data? 285
Why did my machine train trip last night? 289
An alarm occurred last night. Why? 291
This data is interesting. How do I save it for future reference? 291
266 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

Introduction
There are two basic techniques that you can use to manage your System 1 data: correlation and comparison.

Correlation is the process of examining data collected at approximately the same time from dif-
ferent locations. Correlation helps you to identify the root causes of upsets in your plant by com-
paring the near simultaneous behavior of different parts of your process. If you have a plant upset,
you can use this technique to determine what caused the problem.

Correlation can also help you optimize your process. By collecting data from the various assets in
your Enterprise, System 1 software provides the visibility that can help you adjust your process for
optimum performance. To help you correlate your data, System 1 software allows you to create
multiple Plot Sessions and Plot Groups and synchronize cursors across all of them. Many of the
“scenarios” presented in this chapter use this feature. A System Extender such as Bently PER-
FORMANCE SE will provide you with much more information on your process efficiency.

Comparison of present behavior to historical or reference data allows you to compare today’s behav-
ior to past behavior and determine if something has changed over time. Detecting changes early
allows you to adjust processes and detect asset maintenance needs and plan for them.

System 1 software allows you to save particular historical data samples as Reference data or to save
a set of data that defines a comparison benchmark. You can also compare data from similar events
(for example, startups or shutdowns) that occur at different times. Alarms also serve a similar pur-
pose by comparing present behavior to a preset value and alerting you to significant changes.

I see blinking colors. What do they mean and what do I do?

A blinking color indicates that the alarm status for a Point has changed. The color indicates the cur-
rent severity of an alarm. Here are some important things to remember:

Colors and blinking are both propagated up the hierarchy, with the highest cur-
rent alarm severity color dominating.

Colors and blinking are independent of each other. Colors are always linked to
the severity of a current alarm, while blinking is always associated with an unac-
knowledged change in alarm severity.

The color of a node in the Enterprise or Instrument Hierarchy or View indicates

the highest current alarm severity of one or more Points at or below the node.
Alarm colors are red, yellow, orange, and blue, corresponding to alarm severities
of 4, 3, 2, and 1. Red indicates the most severe alarm (severity 4), and green rep-
resents a normal condition with no active alarm, an alarm severity of 0.
Remember that several Points below a particular node in the hierarchy may be in
 I see blinking colors. What do they mean and what do I do? 267

alarm. The color indicates the highest severity that exists, and there may be mul-
tiple instances of that severity below the node.

Blinking indicates that a new, unacknowledged change in alarm status has

occurred. A blinking green color indicates that a Point exited an alarm status and
has returned to normal.

Note that there may be high severity current alarms that have already been acknowledged, and that blink-
ing (indicating an unacknowledged change in alarm status) may be associated with a lower level alarm.

You should follow your established procedure for responding to alarms. If you do not have
one, here is a suggested sequence:

1. Verify that your DAQ is communicating properly. Check the communication sta-
tus notice at the bottom right of the Display window. You may have to widen the
Display window to reveal this notice. If you see DAQ: Communicating, then
your event or alarm data is current. (In System 1 Version 3.0 or later, loss of DAQ
communication will cause the entire part of the hierarchy that depends on that
DAQ to turn non blinking orange; you can immediately determine if a commu-
nication problem has developed in your Enterprise.)

2. Locate the most severe alarm (the highest severity number) first. Use the
Enterprise Hierarchy to follow the color trail down into the hierarchy. Open each
node and look for the same color at the next lower level. Continue opening nodes
until you can see the Variables under a Point.

3. Identify the source of the problem. Launch a set of Bargraphs for the Point that is
in alarm. Right click on the Point and select Bargraph. The color of each Bargraph
column will usually be the same as the current alarm status for that Variable (an
exception might be a Snapshot Point where the alarms have been reset). Also,
alarm setpoints will be visible on the Bargraph, and you will be able to determine
the severity of the situation. Identify the Variable or Variables that are in alarm.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other active alarms. Other alarms may exist with the
same or lower severities.

5. Notify responsible individuals so that they can take appropriate action.

Caution: A “new” alarm condition for a recently-uploaded Snapshot Point

may have actually existed for quite some time. If the indicated alarm could
present a problem, you should consider investigating the situation as a high-
er priority.
268 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

For more detailed information on alarms and events, and to learn how to acknowledge alarms to
stop blinking, see Chapter 5. That chapter also discusses how you can configure Enterprise and
Instrument Hierarchy Filters to quickly display the most important elements of your Enterprise.

How do I determine what is going on now?

You can examine current data several ways:

Bargraphs display only the values of the most recent data samples. They have
the advantage of allowing you to simultaneously view data from a large number
of sources.

Trend plots can be used to display current values and accumulate a history. Trend
plots can be especially useful for comparing a monitored process to targeted val-
ues. Using trend plots, you can see the effect of changes in the process in near
real time.

Spectrum plots can display current spectrum values, or you can accumulate spec-
trum data on spectrum cascade (best used when speed is changing) and waterfall
plots.

Bode and polar plots can be used to display and accumulate current vibration
vector data. These can be used to observe startups and shutdowns and to view
steady state data.

Shaft centerline plots can be used to display and accumulate current rotating
machinery shaft position data. They are most often used for machines with fluid-
film bearings.

Reciprocating plots can also be used to display current values.

Bargraphs display current values by default, and they can be launched from any level in the
Enterprise or Instrument Hierarchies or Views. Decide what level in the hierarchies you want to see
data for, then launch your Bargraphs.

To quickly launch a set of Bargraphs:

Navigate to the level in the hierarchy you wish to view, right click on the node
or View, and select Bargraph. A set of Bargraphs will appear displaying all con-
figured Variables at and below the selected node.
 How do I determine what is going on now? 269

To launch a set of Bargraphs you can save for future use:

1. In the Bargraph Session Manager (View/Bargraph Session Manager), right

click on the Enterprise icon and select New Custom Bargraph. A new Bargraph
Session icon will appear.

2. Drag a node or Point from the Enterprise or Instrument Hierarchy onto the new
Bargraph Session icon. Repeat for more nodes or Points. Using this technique
you can drag an entire Train or Building to create a Bargraph Session that shows
all of the current data at or below that level in your Enterprise.

3. Right click on your Bargraph Session icon and select Show Custom Bargraph.
A Bargraph Session window will appear showing the Bargraphs in your session.

4. Rename your new Bargraph Session by right clicking on the session icon, select-
ing Rename, entering the new name, and pressing the Enter key.

5. Save your Bargraph Session. Right click on your new Bargraph Session icon
and select Save.

Your new Bargraph session will be available for fast access. Next time, go directly to your
Bargraph Session icon, right click, and select Show Custom Bargraph. You will see a Bargraph
display of your current data.
270 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

To view current data in other plot formats, first set up a new Plot Session. By creating (and saving)
a Plot Session, you will be able to quickly open the same plots in the future to view current data.

To create your new Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager (View/Plot Session Manager), right click on the Enterprise
icon and select New Plot Session. The Plot Session Configuration window will appear.

Enter the name of

your Plot Session here

Use this block

to control the
source of your
data

Naming and Data Source areas of the Plot Session Configuration window

2. Enter a name for the new session. In this example, the name is Current Data
Plots.

3. Under the Data Source tab, select Current Data.

4. Click OK to close the window. A new Plot Session icon will appear in the Plot
Session Manager.
 How do I determine what is going on now? 271

Now add a Plot Group to your new Plot Session:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select the type of plot you want to add. The appropriate Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

Drag a Point Two curves

or Variable here configured
One plot
to add another curve
configured
on the same plot

Drag a Point
or Variable
here to create
another plot

The Plot Group Configuration window

2. Drag a Point or Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
Configuration window and over the words New Plot.

3. Repeat step 2 to add more plots or curves to your Plot Group.

4. Click OK to activate your Plot Group. Plots will appear showing current data
coming from your Enterprise.

5. Save your Plot Group and Plot Session. Right click on your open plot and
select Save As... , enter a name for your plot group (for example, Steam Turbine
Trend), and click OK.

6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to add other Plot Groups to your Plot Session. For
example, you might create a Plot Session with a trend plot showing Direct and
1X data, and add a spectrum plot for the same Point.
272 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

To rapidly access your current data next time:

1. Double click on your Plot Session icon to launch all the Plot Groups in that ses-
sion.

or, to launch only selected Plot Groups:

1. Expand your Plot Session hierarchy by clicking on the “+” sign next to the Plot
Session icon.

2. Double click on a particular Plot Group.

See Chapter 7 to learn how to customize the appearance of your Bargraphs and plots. Remember
to save your Plot Session after making any changes if you want to preserve your formatting for later
use.

How do I determine how my Enterprise behaved in the past?

What happened in your Enterprise yesterday (or last week, or last month)? To obtain this informa-
tion, you will need to access the Historical Database, and you will need to decide what kind of time
span you want to use.

There are two ways to configure the time span of your Plot Session:

To look at a fixed block of time (a time span between two fixed dates that never
changes). Setting a fixed block of time will allow you to always look back at the
same data. In the Plot Session Configuration window this is called a Fixed Date
Range. This can be useful if a significant event happened during this period and
you want to be able to reference that data repeatedly in the future.

To look at a relative block of time (a set amount of time ending when you open
the session). In the Plot Session Configuration window this is called a Recent
Date Range. Using a relative block of time will allow you to look back a set
amount of time from whenever you open your Plot Session in the future. For
example, when you arrive at work every morning, you may want to see how your
Enterprise behaved the night before. This requires that you configure your Plot
Session to use a Recent Date Range.

You will create a Plot Session using a procedure similar to the one above for accessing current data.
By creating (and saving) a Plot Session, you will be able to quickly open the same plots in the future
to view the same type of data.
 How do I determine how my Enterprise behaved in the past? 273

To create your new Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager (View/Plot Session Manager), right click on the
Enterprise icon and select New Plot Session. The Plot Session Configuration
window will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new Plot Session at the top of the window.

3. Under the Data Source tab, select the appropriate Date Range for your situation:

If you want to always view a fixed block of time, select Historical Data, then Fixed
Date Range. Set the From and To fields to define your range.

If you want to use a relative block of time, select Historical Data, then Recent Date
Range. Set the appropriate values in the Show Last fields.

Fixed and Recent date ranges in the Plot Session Configuration window

4. Click OK to close the window. A new Plot Session icon will appear in the Plot
Session Manager.
274 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

Now add a Plot Group to your new Plot Session:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select the type of plot you want to add. The appropriate Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

2. Drag a Point or Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
Configuration window and over the words New Plot.

3. Repeat step 2 to add more plots or curves to your Plot Group.

4. Click OK to activate your Plot Group. Plots will appear showing current data
coming from your Enterprise.

5. Save your Plot Group and Plot Session. Right click on your open plot and
select Save As... , enter a name for your plot group, and click OK.

6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to add other Plot Groups to your Plot Session. For
example, you might create a Plot Session with a trend plot showing Direct and
1X data, and add a spectrum plot for the same Point.

To rapidly access your current data next time:

1. Double click on your Plot Session icon to launch all the Plot Groups in that ses-
sion.

or, to launch only a selected Plot Group:

1. Expand your Plot Session hierarchy by clicking on the “+” sign next to the Plot
Session icon.

2. Double click on a particular Plot Group.

See Chapter 7 to learn how to customize the appearance of your Bargraphs and plots. Remember
to save your Plot Session after making any changes if you want to preserve your formatting for later
use.
 How do I compare today’s behavior with yesterday’s? 275

How do I compare today’s behavior with yesterday’s?

Are the assets of your Enterprise behaving differently today than yesterday? Or last month? To
answer these questions, you must compare either current or recent data to the historical data of
interest. You can also compare data from any historical period to data from any other historical
period.

First, we will discuss how to compare recent behavior with a day’s worth of data taken some time
earlier. This basic procedure can be used to compare data from any two (or more) historical ranges.
We will assume that you wish to compare data of the same kind, for example, trend plots of Direct
vibration amplitude. The process involves creating two plots in the same Plot Group with different
date ranges. Again, we will show you how to create a Plot Session that can be saved for future use.

To create two plots with different date ranges, first create a new Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager (View/Plot Session Manager), right click on the
Enterprise icon and select New Plot Session. The Plot Session Configuration
window will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new Plot Session at the top of the window.

3. Under the Data Source tab, select the appropriate Date Range for your situation.
If you want to use a relative block of time, select Historical Data, then Recent
Date Range. To see the previous 24 hours of data, set the values in the Show Last
fields to 1 Days.

4. Click OK to close the window. A new Plot Session icon will appear in the Plot
Session Manager. The default date range for this session is Previous 1 Day.

Now add a Plot Group to your new Plot Session and define the Variables to plot:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select the type of plot you want to add. The appropriate Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

2. Drag a Point or Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
Configuration window and over the words New Plot. The words Plot 1 will
appear with Curve 1 shown below. (More than one curve may appear if you
dragged a Point with multiple Variables that are compatible with your chosen
plot type.)
276 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

Now add another plot to your group. This plot will be configured to look at a different span of time
for the same Variable:

1. Drag the same Point or Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
Configuration window and over the words New Plot, which now appear below
Plot 1. The words Plot 2 will appear with Curve 1 (or more) shown underneath
it.

Adding another plot to a Plot Group

This example shows two trend plots configured for the same Point (BRG04Y)
and Variable (Direct).
 How do I compare today’s behavior with yesterday’s? 277

2. Right click on Curve 1 of Plot 2 and select Configure. The Curve Settings win-
dow will appear. This window is very similar to the Plot Session Configuration
window. The changes we make here will be applicable only to the selected curve.

3. Clear the Use Plot Session Date Range box. We are going to set this curve to a
different date range.

4. Select Historical Data, then Fixed Date Range. Enter the dates and times in the
From and To fields.

5. Click OK to close the Curve Settings window, then click OK to activate your Plot
Group. A Plot will appear.

6. Set your Plot Group to display two plots. At the lower right corner of the Plot
Group window, click on the drop down menu and select the icon representing
two plots.

7. Refine your plot scaling. By default, trend plots will be independently scaled to
show the configured date ranges. You can adjust the scaling of your plots if you
want. Right click anywhere on your plots and select Configure... . Select
Manual Scale Plots, and click on Edit Manual Scales. Adjust your scaling and
close your configuration windows.

8. Save your Plot Group and Plot Session. Right click on your open plot and
select Save As... , enter a name for your plot group, and click OK.

To quickly reopen your Plot Session, double click on the Plot Session icon.
278 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

Using an overlay, you can use the same plot to compare today’s data to a previously-captured ref-
erence data sample. Overlays are available only for orbit timebase plots, timebase plots, spectrum
plots, reciprocating plots (a theoretical overlay), and rod position plots. For example, using this
feature, you could compare today’s spectrum from a gearbox-mounted accelerometer to a spectrum
taken from the same location six months ago. To use an overlay, you must have saved a reference
data sample at some time in the past. (An exception is the theoretical overlay available on a recip-
rocating plot.)

In this example, we will assume that you want to compare a current gearbox spectrum sample to a
reference spectrum that was collected at some time in the past. But remember that you can apply
this technique to any type of plot that has an overlay available. Also, you do not have to compare
current data to a reference; you can compare any historical data to a reference.

To create a new Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager (View/Plot Session Manager), right click on the
Enterprise icon and select New Plot Session. The Plot Session Configuration
window will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new session.

3. Under the Data Source tab, select Current Data. To use historical data, select the
appropriate historical data range.

4. Click OK to close the window. A new Plot Session icon will appear in the Plot
Session Manager.

Now add a Plot Group to your new Plot Session:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select the type of plot you want to add (for example, Spectrum). The appropri-
ate Plot Group Configuration window will appear.

2. Drag a Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group Configuration
window and over the words New Plot. For this gearbox spectrum example, you
might want to use an Asynchronous Waveform Variable.
 How do I compare today’s behavior with yesterday’s? 279

Your spectrum plot has been configured to display current data. Now add the overlay to your spec-
trum plot.

1. In the Plot Group Configuration window, in the row corresponding to your curve
(Curve 1 in this example), click in the Overlay column. A small drop down menu
will appear. Click on Select Overlay.

Adding an overlay to a plot

The Waveform Reference Selection window will appear.

2. Select your reference waveform from the list and click Done.

3. Click OK to activate your Plot Group. A plot will appear showing current data
with an overlay.

4. Save your Plot Group and Plot Session. Right click on your open plot and
select Save As... , enter a name for your plot group, and click OK.
280 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

How do I view data along a machine train?

It can be very useful to view data of the same type along a machine train. Multiple polar plots are
often used to view 1X startup or shutdown data from each measurement plane along a train. This
information is used to infer mode shapes to aid in balancing and malfunction diagnosis. It can also
be very useful to create a set of orbits along a machine train, which can be examined for evidence
of excessive radial loads, rubs, or other problems. In this section, you will learn how to create a set
of polar plots. This technique we will demonstrate can be applied to polar plots, Bode plots, orbit
plots, timebase plots, and shaft centerline plots. Again, we will create a Plot Session that can be
stored for future use.

We will create a set of polar plots based on historical data, but you can also create plots showing
current data or data from any event.

To create a new Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager (View/Plot Session Manager), right click on the
Enterprise icon and select New Plot Session. The Plot Session Configuration
window will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new session.

3. Under the Data Source tab, select the appropriate date range. To see current data,
select Current Data. To use historical data, select the appropriate historical data
range.

4. Click OK to close the window. A new Plot Session icon will appear in the Plot
Session Manager.

Now add a Plot Group to your new Plot Session:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select the type of plot you want to add (for example, Polar to create a polar plot).
The appropriate Plot Group Configuration window will appear.

Finally, configure your plots:

1. Locate the Points in your hierarchy (or Train) where you want to view your data.

2. Drag a Point or Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
Configuration window and over the words New Plot. To create an polar plot,
drag the 1X Variable; if you drag a Point into the Polar Plot Group Configuration
window, a 1X Variable will automatically be used by default.
 How do I view data along a machine train? 281

3. Repeat step 2 for each Point you wish to add. Work along the machine train and
drag successive Points onto New Plots. The idea is to create a separate plot for
each Point.

Note: orbits use transducer pairs. You only need to drag one Point of the
pair to create a plot; data from the other Point will be used automatically if
the Points are properly associated.

4. For easier data interpretation, all plots should be scaled the same. Select Manual
Scale Plots, then click Edit Manual Scales... . Adjust the scales for all plots to the
same setting, and then click OK to close the Manual Scales window.

5. Click on the View tab and select RPM labels. This will display speed labels at dif-
ferent positions in the plots.

6. Click on the Synchronize Cursors tab and select RPM. This will lock the cursors
on the different plots together.

7. Click OK to display your plots.

8. Click on the small menu at the lower right corner of the Plot Group window and
select a display that will show multiple plots per page. If you have configured 2
plots, display 2 per page; for 3 to 4 plots, display 4 per page; for between 5 and
8 plots, select 8 per page.

9. Save your Plot Group and Plot Session. Right click on your open plot and
select Save As... , enter a name for your plot group, and click OK.

When you are viewing historical data, use the paging controls to move through time and see suc-
cessive groups of plots.
282 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

How do I correlate data from different sources?

Correlation is a powerful tool for analyzing how your Enterprise is operating and for determining
the root cause of a system upset. When an upset occurs, one of the biggest challenges is to deter-
mine what else happened in the process or machine at the same time. The ability to view and cor-
relate process and mechanical condition data in the same database and display is extremely pow-
erful.

With System 1 software, you can view vibration data from machinery, combine that data with
process data from anywhere in your Enterprise, and correlate process data from any of your
Enterprise assets, from temperatures, pressures, and flows, to fluid levels and valve positions.

You can correlate data using two different methods:

Plot dissimilar data in separate Plot Groups. In this context, dissimilar means
that the data cannot be plotted on the same plot format. You can correlate
between Plot Groups by using the Synchronize Cursors feature and checking
Inter Plot Group Synchronization. This allows you to identify data points that
were sampled at the same time or speed. An example application would be to
correlate valve position on a trend plot with a polar plot of vibration vector data
from the LP steam turbine.

Plot similar data in the same Plot Group. Here you have two options: plot the
data on separate plots or combine the data for display on a single plot. For exam-
ple, you can display valve position, steam flow, inlet temperature, and direct
vibration on a single trend plot. Note that the units of measurement do not have
to be the same. System 1 software will automatically shift to a % Full Scale ver-
tical axis to accommodate different types of units. Using several plots, you can
use the Synchronize Cursors feature to identify data values that were taken at the
same time.

In this section, you will learn how to do both methods; at the same time, you will learn how to cre-
ate a Plot Session that you can save for future use. We will assume you want to correlate data that
has been taken in a recent period of time. Remember that you can correlate any current or histori-
cal data.

To create a new Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager (View/Plot Session Manager), right click on the
Enterprise icon and select New Plot Session. The Plot Session Configuration
window will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new session.

 How do I correlate data from different sources? 283

3. Under the Data Source tab, select the appropriate data range. For this example,
select Historical Data, then Recent Date Range, and enter the period of time you
want to look back in the Show Last field, for example 2 Years.

4. Click OK to close the window. A new Plot Session icon will appear in the Plot
Session Manager.

To correlate dissimilar data, add multiple Plot Groups to your new Plot Session:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select the first type of plot you want to add. The appropriate Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

2. Drag a Point or Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
Configuration window and over the words New Plot. The words Plot 1 will
appear with one or more Curves below it. Each curve is associated with a single
Variable.

3. If you want, add more curves to the same plot by dragging other Variables over
the words Plot 1; or, you can create other plots in the same Plot Group by drag-
ging other Variables over the words New Plot.

4. Click on the Synchronize Cursors tab and, in the Synchronize Cursors area, select
On Sample, On Time (good for a trend plot), or On RPM (good for startup or
shutdown data), and check Inter Plot Group Synchronization.

5. Click OK to activate your Plot Group. Plots will appear showing current data
coming from your Enterprise.

6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for another Plot Group.

7. Save your Plot Session. Right click on any open plot and select Save As... ,
enter a name for your plot group, and click OK.

To correlate similar data in a single Plot Group, add multiple curves to a single plot, or multiple
plots to a single Plot Group:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select the type of plot you want to add. The appropriate Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

2. Drag a Point or Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
284 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

Configuration window and over the words New Plot. The words Plot 1 will
appear with one or more Curves below it. Each curve is associated with a single
Variable.

3. If you want, add more curves to the same plot by dragging other Variables over
the words Plot 1; or, you can create other plots in the same Plot Group by drag-
ging other Variables over the words New Plot.

4. If you have created multiple plots, click on the Synchronize Cursors tab and, in
the Synchronize Cursors area, select On Sample, On Time (good for a trend plot),
or On RPM (good for startup or shutdown data).

Synchronizing cursors for a plot with multiple curves

5. Click OK to activate your Plot Group. Plots will appear showing current data
coming from your Enterprise.

6. Save your Plot Session. Right click on any open plot and select Save As... ,
enter a name for your plot group, and click OK.
 How do I find and look at my startup or shutdown data? 285

How do I find and look at my startup or shutdown data?

Startup and shutdown data can greatly enhance your understanding of the behavior of your critical
rotating machinery. This transient data allows you to identify balance resonance speeds, see how
shaft centerline position changes with speed and load, detect changes in orbit shapes, look for any
super- or subsynchronous vibration frequencies, and obtain slow roll vectors for comparison or
future reference. All of this information is extremely valuable for documenting your machine’s
behavior and for aiding malfunction diagnosis.

Startup and shutdown data should be thoroughly examined using 1X and 2X Bode and polar plots,
spectrum cascade plots (full spectrum, if available), average shaft centerline plots, and orbit and
timebase plots.

In this section, you will learn how to locate your historical data and create a Plot Session useful for
documenting a startup or shutdown. The basic procedure will be the following:

Locate your data. Depending on your instrumentation, historical startup or shut-

down data may be tagged as an event, or you may need to define a historical time
period that includes the data you want to examine.

Create a Plot Session with several Plot Groups. You should include Bode, polar,
shaft centerline, orbit timebase, and spectrum cascade Plot Groups. Use the
Synchronize Cursors On RPM feature to tie your data together across Plot
Groups.

Include plots for each plane of interest in your machine train. You should exam-
ine data all along your train using scaling that allows you to see relative magni-
tudes. (Your full scale ranges should typically be the same for all of each type of
plot.) This aspect is discussed above in the section titled How do I view data
along a machine train?.

At the end of this section, you will learn how to use the Plot Session you create here to view your
current data during a startup or shutdown.

If you have a TDXnet or TDI system, startup and shutdown data may be tagged as an event or an
alarm. For example, manually initiated startups and shutdowns will be tagged as Startup or
Shutdown events, but if a shutdown was triggered by an alarm, it will be tagged as a Protection
Alarm event. When you configure your Plot Session and the data was tagged as an event, you can
define the data range using an Event Manager interface. If many events exist in your Historical
Database, it may be helpful to know when your event occurred so that you can quickly locate it. If
your data was not tagged as an event, you will need to know the approximate date and time ranges
of your data.
286 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

To create your new Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager (View/Plot Session Manager), right click on the
Enterprise icon and select New Plot Session. The Plot Session Configuration
window will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new Plot Session at the top of the window.

3. Under the Data Source tab, select Historical Data, then select the appropriate
Date Range for your situation:

If your data is tagged as an event, select Event Data, then click on Get Event. An
Event Manager interface will appear (see Chapter 5 for information on how to
use the Event Manager). Select the event of interest, and click OK. The event
date range will be entered in the Event Data field.

If you want to manually define the block of time containing the data, select Fixed
Date Range. Set the appropriate values in the From and To fields.

4. Click OK to close the window. A new Plot Session icon will appear in the Plot
Session Manager.

Now add multiple Plot Groups to your new Plot Session. Each group will contain multiple plots
from different measurement planes in your machine Train:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select the first type of plot you want to add. The appropriate Plot Group
Configuration window will appear.

2. Locate the Points in your hierarchy (or Train) where you wish to view data.

3. Drag a Point or Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
Configuration window and over the words New Plot.

Note: you can save time by dragging the Train in the Enterprise Hierarchy into
the configuration window. All Points that belong to the Train will be automati-
cally added as separate plots. However, adding them individually allows you to
control the order of the plots.

4. Repeat step 3 for each Point you wish to add. Work along the machine train and
drag successive Points onto New Plots. The idea is to create a separate plot for
each Point.
 How do I find and look at my startup or shutdown data? 287

Note: orbit plots, shaft centerline plots, and full spectrum cascade plots use
transducer pairs. You only need to drag one Point of the pair to create a plot;
data from the other Point will be used automatically if the Points are prop-
erly associated.

5. For easier data interpretation, all plots of the same type should have the same full
scale. Select Manual Scale Plots, then click Edit Manual Scales... . Adjust the
scales for all plots to the same setting, and then click OK to close the Manual
Scales window.

6. Click on the View tab and select Paging by Sample. This will allow you to see
data for all the Points along a train. Paging will reveal the next set of samples
along the train.

7. Click OK to display your plots.

8. Click on the small menu at the lower right corner of the Plot Group window and
select a display that will show multiple plots per page. If you have configured 2
plots, display 2 per page; for 3 to 4 plots, display 4 per page; for between 5 and
8 plots, select 8 per page.

9. Save your Plot Group and Plot Session. Right click on your open plot and
select Save As... , enter a name for your plot group, and click OK.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for each additional plot type you wish to include in the
session.

When you are done, you will have a Plot Session that will show you all the data along your machine
train for this event. You can open it at any time by double clicking on the Plot Session icon.
288 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

In the future, if you want to view data from another historical startup or shutdown event, you can
modify your existing Plot Session to use the new data range:

1. Right click on your existing Plot Session icon (not one of the Plot Group icons)
and select Configure... . The Plot Session Configuration window will appear.

2. Change your Data Source to correspond to your new event, and click OK.

3. Double click on your Plot Session icon to open your plots. The new data will be
displayed.

4. If you want to save this configuration change, right click on your Plot Session
icon and select Save/Plot Session. If you do not save this change, next time
you open the Plot Session, the original settings will apply.

To view your data during a startup or shutdown:

1. Right click on your Plot Session icon and select Configure... . The Plot Session
Configuration window will appear.

2. Change your Data Source to Current Values, and click OK.

3. Double click on your Plot Session icon to open your plots. You will be able to
see your current startup or shutdown data.

4. If you want to save this configuration, right click on your Plot Session icon and
select Save/Plot Session. If you do not save this change, next time you open
the Plot Session, the original settings will apply.
 Why did my machine train trip last night? 289

Why did my machine train trip last night?

One of your critical machine trains went down last night. How do you determine what happened?
This is where correlation of data from various parts of your Enterprise can be very powerful. To
determine the root cause of your upset, you may have to examine multiple sources of data that
include a period of time before the trip.

If a System 1 event occurred, you can use the event to help you locate the data. In the event of an
alarm-driven trip, TDXnet and TDI Communications Processors automatically send data to the
System 1 DAQ that includes data from a period of time before the trip (see the section Collection
Groups and data collection during alarms in Chapter 6). If no System 1 event occurred, you can
set the Date Range of your Plot Session to a recent period of time that is long enough to include
the trip and some time before it.

A trend plot is a good tool to use for your initial analysis. You can combine data from a large num-
ber of sources on the same plot and look for significant events that may have led to the problem.
Later, as you need more information, you can create other plot types to support your analysis.

If the trip was associated with a Protection or Management alarm, there is a fast way to see data
from the Variable that went into alarm. You can launch the Event Manager from the machine train
level, find the event, and directly launch a trend plot for the Variable that alarmed directly from the
Event Manager:

1. Right click on your machine train and select Event Manager... .

2. Use the filtering options at the upper left of the Event Manager window to show
only the alarms of interest (for example, check Management (SW) Alarms to see
only that type of alarm.

3. Locate the alarm in the list and double click on it to launch a trend plot for the
Variable that went into alarm.

Root cause analysis will likely require more data. A good way to start is to create a Plot Session
with trend plot data from multiple sources.

To create a new Plot Session:

1. In the Plot Session Manager (View/Plot Session Manager), right click on the
Enterprise icon and select New Plot Session. The Plot Session Configuration
window will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new Plot Session at the top of the window.
290 Chapter 8: Getting The Most From Your System 1 Software

3. Under the Data Source tab, select Historical Data, then select the appropriate
Date Range for your situation:

If your data is tagged as an event, select Event Data, then click on Get Event. An
Event Manager interface will appear (see Chapter 5 for information on how to
use the Event Manager). Select the event of interest (likely a Protection alarm if
a monitor triggered the trip), and click OK. The event date range will be entered
in the Event Data field.

If your data is not tagged as an event, select Recent Date Range, and set the range
to a period long enough to include a period of time before your trip.

4. Click OK to close the window. A new Plot Session icon will appear in the Plot
Session Manager.

Now create a trend plot group that correlates data from multiple sources:

1. Right click on your new Plot Session icon, select New Plot Group, and then
select Trend. The Trend Plot Group Configuration window will appear.

2. Drag a Point or a Variable from a Hierarchy or View into the Plot Group
Configuration window and over the words New Plot. The words Plot 1 will appear
with one or more Curves below it. Each curve will be associated with a single Variable.

3. If you want, add more curves to the same plot by dragging other Points or
Variables over the words Plot 1; or, you can create other plots in the same Plot
Group by dragging other Variables over the words New Plot.

4. If you have created multiple plots, click on the Synchronize Cursors tab and, in
the Synchronize Cursors area, select On Time (good for a trend plot).

5. Click OK to activate your Plot Group. Plots will appear showing current data
coming from your Enterprise.

6. Save your Plot Session. Right click on any open plot and select Save As... ,
enter a name for your plot group, and click OK.

Now you can examine your data and look for indications as to what might have caused the prob-
lem. If you need to adjust the time span, right click on your Plot Session icon, open the Plot Session
Configuration window, and change the span of time of your data. Once you locate information of
interest, you can add other plots to your session and examine your data in more detail. Remember
to save the changes to your Plot Groups and Plot Sessions.
 An alarm occurred last night. Why? 291

An alarm occurred last night. Why?

Last night, an alarm occurred in your Enterprise. How do you determine the cause? Since this sce-
nario is very similar to the one in the previous section, follow the same methodology. In this case,
an alarm will have registered a Protection or Management alarm event that you can use to locate
the data and the source Variable. Use the Event Manager to get a quick look at the trend data from
the Variable that triggered the alarm. To view more data, build a Plot Session with one or more
trend plots. Use this information to correlate and locate the likely source of the problem. Add more
plots as necessary to help in your root cause analysis.

This data is interesting. How do I save it for future reference?

While browsing through data from part of your process or a machine, you may notice an unex-
pected change in some dynamic pressure data, an abnormal temperature reading, an unusual orbit,
or an unusual subsynchronous vibration in a spectrum. You may want to save this data for future
reference. Saving this information is easy in System 1. Remember that whenever you create a new
plot (Plot Group), a new Plot Session is created automatically. Saving your Plot Group will auto-
matically save the Plot Session.

To save your data for future reference:

1. Right click anywhere on your plot and select Save As... .

2. Enter a name for your Plot Group and click OK.

Your Plot Group will be saved under the name you specify, but, unless you have previously named
your Plot Session, it will be saved with a default name like New Plot Session3. You should rename
your Plot Session to make it easier to find the next time you want to view your data.

To rename your Plot Session:

1. Make the Plot Session Manager visible by going to the Display menu and select-
ing View/Plot Session Manager.

2. Locate your new Plot Session, right click on the Plot Session icon, and select
Rename.

3. Enter a new name and press the Enter key.

You may also want to save a particular sample (for example, a slow roll waveform or vector sam-
ple) as a Reference sample for later use in compensating plots. To learn how to do this, see the sec-
tion Collecting Reference Data in Chapter 6.

Note that, if your Historical Database is purged at some time in the future, your data will be lost
unless you archive your data. Archiving is a feature that allows you to save important information
in your database for later access. A System 1 Archive database includes both configuration data and
historical data for the specified components of your Enterprise.

To learn how to archive your important data, see Help: Contents/Display Features and
Navigation/Archiving to learn how to archive your data. To learn how to open an archive and view
the data, see Help: Index/Open Archive.
Index

1X variable viewing alarm setpoints in a Bargraph 90

viewing the alarm settings for variables 101 viewing basic alarm settings 98
3500 Monitoring System Applications
3500/72M Rod Position Variables 237 Configuration. See Configuration application
3500/77M Cylinder Pressure monitor hardware Data Acquisition. See Data Acquisition
Variables 234 Display. See Display application
alarm equivalents for 3500 and System 1 72 linking external software applications with
Acceptance Region variable Enterprise components 48
defined 104 Microsoft SQL Server. See SQL Server
viewing Acceptance Region settings 104 Areas 51
viewing the alarm settings for a variable 99 Asset 53
Acknowledging alarms and events Associations 65
defined 93 Automated Sample Filtering 187
acknowledging an alarm 95 Automatic DAQ restart 20
use of blinking to indicate 74 Automatic scaling 169
Active box 54 Average shaft centerline plot 195
ActiveSync 129 Bargraph Session Manager 68
Alarm Bargraphs
defined 71 defined 90
An alarm occurred last night. Why? 291 adding points to a Bargraph Session 260
assigning a sound to an alarm 107 Bargraph Session Manager defined 68
Current Alarms Display 80 creating Custom Bargraph Sessions 259
data collected in nested Collection Groups 120 creating plots from bargraphs 155
data collection during alarms 116 Custom Bargraph Sessions defined 143
documenting information about an alarm 96 customizing the appearance of Bargraphs 262
enabling or disabling alarm inhibit 106 sample Bargraph displays 91
equivalent alarms for monitoring systems and using Bargraphs to examine current data 90
System 1 72 Baseline data
locating a point that is in alarm 78 collecting baseline reference data 124
Management alarms 73 Bently Docuview SE 11
Protection alarms 72 Bently Manual Input
showing alarm setpoints in plots 171 defined 10
suggested sequence for responding to alarms 267 entering data using Bently Manual Input 136
System 1 alarm colors and severity 71 primary use of 55
use of colors and blinking 74 Bently Performance SE 11
using Hierarchy Filtering to locate quickly 79
294 Index

Blinking Computer, DAQ computer. See Data Acquisition

alarms and events that cause blinking 75 Computers and System 1 6
and unacknowledged alarms 74 Configuration application
blinking colors; what to do 266 description 8
BMI. See Bently Manual Input user rights required to view alarm settings 98
Bode plot Configuration Database
defined 192 defined 4
startup or shutdown data from different times 181 contents 8
Buildings Connecting to an Enterprise
defined 51 configuring an Enterprise for Quick Connect 34
displaying current alarms and status for 81 connecting to an Enterprise the first time 30
Cascade plots 222 connecting to a remote Enterprise using your
Change Filtering remote account (Impersonation) 31
defined 112 connecting using the Display menu 28
Change Filtering settings 114 Quick Connect 26
Clearance boundary 197 Connection, Data Acquisition Connection
Collection Groups Manager
defined 66 description 17
changing Collection Group alarm settings 118 launching the Data Acquisition Connection
collecting reference data using 124 Manager 17
viewing Collection Groups 117 Copying and pasting plots 256
Colors Correlation
alarm colors 71 defined 266
blinking colors and alarms 74 correlating data from different sources 282
blinking colors; what to do 266 CP. See Communications Processor
controlling plot background colors 184 Current alarm
setting line styles and line colors 182 defined 74
use of color in bargraphs to indicate alarms 90 Current Alarms Display 80
Combined Force 245 Current Values
Communication data access time 9
establishing between a Snapshot and a DAQ 129 using a Bargraph to display current values 92
reestablishing communication with a DAQ 77 verifying that Display is receiving data 37
verifying that a DAQ computer is communicating ways to examine current data 268
37, 77 Cursor, Plot Cursor
Communications Processor as displayed in the Plot Group window 161
data collection by different Communications displaying the value at the plot cursor in a Tabular
Processors 122 list 230
sample TDXnet Collection Group 66 splitting the cursor in Orbit timebase plots 205
System 1 default data import and export rates 111 synchronizing cursors across different plots 174
tagging startup or shutdown data as an event 285 Curve
TDXnet Initialization utility 10 adding curves to a Plot Group 150
Test Communication utility 10 changing the Variable associated with a curve 177
Compensation compensating a curve 180
defined 178 controlling how curves are drawn 172
from Plot Group Configuration 180 plot curves in the Plot Group window 160
creating a filtered timebase plot 206 quickly selecting another curve on a plot 186
 Index 295

selecting another curve on the same plot 162 examining current data 268
setting line styles and line colors 182 setting the Default Data Range 143
showing multiple curves on a single plot 181 viewing data along a machine train 280
Custom assets 53 Data Range
Custom Bargraph Sessions 143 modifying the Data Range 88
Custom executable 48 setting the Default Data Range for plots 143
Custom Points 59 showing events in the data range 87
Customizing the Display interface 44 Databases
DACM. See Data Acquisition Connection access permission. See Security
Manager accessing using Microsoft SQL 6
Danger alarm and SQL Server 6
equivalent alarms for monitoring systems and Configuration Database 4
System 1 72 data access time 9
DAQ. See Data Acquisition data collected in nested Collection Groups 120
Data Acquisition Database Tools 10
description 4 Historical Database 6
collection rates during normal operation 110 legacy data as orphaned points 59
collection rates during transient operation 122 Date Range 272. See also Data Range
configuring DAQ for automatic restart 20 DCM. See Data Collector Modules
DAQ computers per Enterprise 6 DDE Exporter. See also Data exporters
determining the status of a DAQ computer 16 default data import and export rate 111
establishing communication between a DAQ and Decision Support 11
a Snapshot 129 Default
reestablishing communication with a DAQ 77 Default Data Range 143
starting data acquisition 18 Default Layout 50
verifying that a DAQ computer is communicating Delete
37, 77 deleting a Plot Session or Plot Group 159
Data Acquisition Connection Manager Demonstration database 6
description 17 Diagnostics. See Machinery diagnostics
launching 17 Direct variable
Data collection rates viewing the alarm settings for Variables 101
during normal operation 110 Disabling
during transient operation 122 disabling alarm sounds 108
Data Collector Modules disabling Management alarms during transient
defined 4 events 105
table of 5 disabling Quick Connect 37
verifying that data modules are working 22 Display application
Data entry. See Bently Manual Input description 9
Data Exporters connecting Display to an Enterprise 26
defined 4 customizing the Display interface 44
default data import and export rates 111 Layouts and the View menu 50
table of 5 organizational elements 50
Data plotting starting Display 26
introduction 141 verifying that Display is receiving data 37
configuring the time span of a Plot Session 272 DocuView SE 11
creating two plots with different date ranges 275 Dot to Dot curve option 172
296 Index

Dynamic data Event Manager 82. See also Event Manager

defined 55 filtering by Event Type 86
amount collected during a transient event 122 getting data from a historical event 148
selecting a sample for compensation 179 overlaying data from different events 181
setting the dynamic data update rate for plots 145 startup or shutdown events 285
Dynamic Variable plots use of blinking to indicate new events 74
defined 188 Event Manager
cascade and waterfall plots 222 defined 9
half and full spectrum plots 213 Event Manager shortcuts 89
Orbit and timebase plots 203 filtering information in Event Manager 85
reciprocating and rod position plots 231 launching a trend plot for the Variable that
Enterprise alarmed 289
defined 4 launching the Event Manager 82
DAQ computers per Enterprise 6 Exclusive Filtering 87
Hierarchies and Views 40 Exporters. See Data Exporters
linking reference documents 11 Extenders. See System 1 Extenders
rules for Enterprise structure 6 External executables, associating to Enterprise
System 1 modules in a sample Enterprise 7 components 48
Enterprise, connecting Filters
configuring an Enterprise for Quick Connect 34 accessing Change Filtering settings 114
connecting to an Enterprise 26 creating a filtered timebase plot 206
connecting to an Enterprise for the first time 30 filtering information in the Event Manager 85
error messages 27 guidelines for using Hierarchy Filtering and
Impersonate, connecting to a remote Enterprise Current Alarms Display 81
using your remote account 31 setting Hierarchy Filters 62
User list for accessing Enterprises 25 using Change Filtering to reduce data storage
Enterprise Hierarchy requirements 112
defined 40 using Exclusive Filtering to show only certain
controlling the visibility 50 types of events 87
controlling which variables are displayed 57 using hierarchy filtering to locate alarms quickly 79
launching a plot or Plot Group from the using Sample Filtering to limit the data displayed
Enterprise Hierarchy 152 in a plot 186
locating the source of an alarm in the Enterprise Fixed Date Range 145
Hierarchy 78 Formats. See also Plot formats in System 1
navigating by using Groups, Areas, Plants, and compatible plot formats and Variables 142
Buildings 50 plot formats as displayed in the Plot Group win-
Points and Variables 55 dow 160
sample Enterprise and Instrument hierarchies 60 Full spectrum plot
sample Enterprise hierarchy 56 defined 213
setting Hierarchy Filters 62 creating a full spectrum plot 215
Enumerated Points 59 features of a full spectrum cascade plot 223
Event identifying a frequency line 216
defined 70 Gap Variable
displaying events on a plot 173 viewing the alarm settings for 101
documenting information about an event 96 Gridlines
event categories 70 turning plot gridlines on and off 171
 Index 297

Groups Impersonate, communicate with a remote

defined 51 Enterprise using your remote account 31
Collection Groups and data collection 116 In-Band or Out-of-Band alarms 101
Collection Groups defined 66 Inhibiting alarms during Transient events 105
Plot Groups 143 Initialization. See TDXnet
Half and full spectrum plots 213 Inspection Points 59
Half spectrum plot Instrument Hierarchy
defined 213 defined 42, 60
creating a half spectrum plot 214 controlling the visibility of 50
identifying a frequency line 216 launching plots or Plot Groups from 152
Hardware alarms. See Protection alarms Sample Enterprise and Instrument Hierarchies 60
Hardware Variables Setting Hierarchy Filters 62
Variables provided by 3500 monitors for recipro- Instrument Layout 50
cating plots 231 Invalid data
Header, Plot Header plotting invalid data 173
content of the plot header 161 Journal Editor 96
controlling the appearance of plot headers 175 Keyphasor
Hierarchy Keyphasor Collection Group 66
data from a Collection Group hierarchy 120 synchronous waveform samples collected at a
Enterprise Hierarchy 42 Keyphasor event 203
hierarchical structure for plots in System 1 143 Layouts 50
Instrument Hierarchy 60 Legacy data and orphaned points 59
launching a plot or Plot Group from a hierarchy 152 Level alarms
sample Enterprise and Instrument Hierarchies 60 viewing alarm settings 101
setting Hierarchy Filters 62 License Viewer utility 10
Hierarchy Filtering to locate alarms quickly 79 Lines. See Curves
using nodes in the DAQ hierarchy 23 Linking external applications to Enterprise com-
Historical Database ponents 48
defined 6 Linking reference documents 11
and the Default Data Range 143 List, Tabular List 228
Change Filtering and storage requirements 112 Locating a problem 78
entering data manually 136 Logarithmic scaling 169
getting data from a historical event 148 Machine trains 81
legacy data and orphaned points 59 defined 52
Hyper compressor Rod Movement 236 how to view data along a machine train 280
Icons listing alarms for a machine train 81
creating plots or Plot Groups from a plot icon 154 sample machine train view 56
DAQ icon, determining the status of a DAQ com- why did my machine train trip last night? 289
puter 16 Machinery diagnostics
DAQ icons in the Data Acquisition Connection correlating data from different sources 282
Manager 18 examining startup or shutdown data 285
making icons larger 45 using correlation and comparison to diagnose
Quick Connect icon 26 problems 266
stoplight icon, point status notifications 76 viewing data along a machine train 280
System 1 alarm colors and severity 71 Management alarms
use of colors and blinking 74 defined 73
298 Index

bargraph alarm color dot 90 Point Status notifications 76

changing the properties of 98 Off Tour Points 64
data collected during a Management Alarm 116 OLE Automation Exporter
displaying Management alarms with Exclusive default data import and export rates 111
Filtering 87 see also Data exporters
Management Layout 50 Orbit and timebase plots 203
Managers Organizational elements 50
Data Acquisition Connection Manager 17 Orphaned Points 59
Event Manager 82 Over Alarm
Plot and Bargraph Session Managers 68 defined 101
Portable Control Manager 130 viewing alarm settings 98
Manual data entry. See Bently Manual Input Overlay
Manual scaling 169 adding a theoretical overlay to a reciprocating
Maximum Returned Events limit plot 243
defined 87 comparing data to a reference data sample 278
modifying 88 overlaying a reference waveform in a timebase
Measured values. See Points plot 208
Microsoft ActiveSync 129 Password
Microsoft SQL. See SQL Server see also Security
Modules System 1 Password utility 10
Configuration. See Configuration application Paste
Data Acquisition. See Data Acquisition copying and pasting plots 256
Data Collector. See Data Collector Modules Performance
Display. See Display application Change Filtering and system performance 112
System 1 modules in a sample Enterprise 7 using Sample Filtering to limit the data displayed
Monitoring systems in a plot 186
alarm equivalents for monitoring systems 72 Permissions. See Security
use of trip multiply in monitoring systems 105 Plant asset data
Nested Collection Groups 120 used in Display application 9
NetDDE. See also Data exporters Plants 52
creating a Plot Group for all points from a DDE Plot and variable compatibilities 142
server 152 Plot cursor
default data import and export rates 111 displaying the value at the plot cursor in a Tabular
Network permissions. See Security list 230
Node plot cursor in the Plot Group window 161
defined 42 splitting the cursor in Orbit timebase plots 205
listing all current alarm and status types for 80 synchronizing cursors across different plots 174
Normal operation Plot formats in System 1
data collection rates during normal operation 110 Bode plots 192
Notes cascade and waterfall plots 222
adding notes to a plot 184 half and full spectrum plots 213
adding notes to alarms and events 96 polar plots 192
using Docuview to link reference documents to reciprocating and rod position plots 231
an Enterprise or a Hierarchy 11 shaft centerline plots 195
Notifications trend plots 190
assigning a sound to an alarm 107 X vs Y plots 201
 Index 299

Plot Group Point Status notifications 76

defined 143 special 3500 monitor Points used for reciprocat-
adding a Plot Group to a Plot Session 149 ing plots 231
adding new data to an existing Plot Group 158 types of Points 58
closing all Plot Group windows 188 Polar plot
compensating a curve from Plot Group defined 192
Configuration 180 creating a set of polar plots to display data along
copying and pasting plots 256 a machine train 280
displaying multiple plots in a Plot Group 164 showing startup and shutdown data from different
printing plots 256 times 181
Reciprocating Plot Group 231 Portable Data Collectors
renaming a Plot Group 156 alarms from portable data collectors 94
saving a Plot Group 156 downloading a route to a Snapshot 130
understanding the Plot Group window 160 removing the alarm status from a portable data
using the Plot Group Configuration window 168 collection Route 95
Plot Header Snapshot route defined 64
content of the plot header 161 Snapshot Vibration Variables 58
controlling the appearance of plot headers 175 uploading data from a Snapshot portable data col-
Plot Session lector 129
defined 68 Precession 213
adding or deleting data in Plot Sessions 158 defined 213
adding plots to a new Plot Session 149 forward and reverse 213
closing all Plot Group windows in a Session 188 Preset layouts. See Management, Instrument, or
configuring the time span of a Plot Session 272 Default layout
creating a hierarchical structure of plots 143 Printing plots 256
renaming a Plot Session 157 Process Points 58
saving a Plot Session 156 Properties
starting a new Plot Session 146 defined 53
Plot Session Manager changing the properties of a Management Alarm
defined 68 98
starting a new Plot Session 146 Protection alarms
Plotting data defined 72
introduction 141 bargraph alarm color dots for 90
comparing data by using two curves in a plot 181 data collected during a Protection Alarm 116
controlling what data is presented on a plot 172 PV diagram 248
plotting invalid data 173 Quick Connect
Plotting Range. See Data Range configuring an Enterprise for Quick Connect 34
Point connecting to an Enterprise using 26
defined 55 disabling Quick Connect 37
adding Points to a Bargraph Session 260 Range
Collection Groups 66 configuring the time span of a Plot Session 272
displaying Current Values for a Point 92 creating two plots with different date ranges 275
Instrument hierarchy and the signal path 60 Default Data Range 143
locating a Point that is in alarm 78 displaying events 87
Off Tour Points 64 Rates, Data collection
Orphaned Points 59 during normal operation 110
300 Index

during transient operation 122 quickly adjusting the scaling of a plot 186
Real-time data Scenarios, User Scenarios
data access time 9 An alarm occurred last night. Why? 291
using a bargraph to display current values 92 How do I compare today’s behavior with yester-
verifying that Display is receiving data 37 day’s? 275
ways to examine current data 268 How do I correlate data from different sources? 282
Recent Date Range 145 How do I determine how my Enterprise behaved
Reciprocating plots in the past? 272
defined 231 How do I determine what is going on now? 268
adding a reference overlay to 243 How do I find and look at my startup or shut-
creating reciprocating plots 241 down data? 285
displaying rod position data on 250 How do I view data along a machine train? 280
features of a reciprocating plot 242 I see blinking colors 266
PV diagram 249 This data is interesting. How do I save it for
Reducing data storage requirements 112 future reference? 291
Reference Data Why did my machine train trip last night? 289
defined 124 SE. See System 1 Extenders
collecting a set of Reference Data 124 Security
entering Reference Data manually 128 setting security in Configuration 8
overlaying a reference waveform in a timebase System 1 security and User Rights 15
plot 208 user list for accessing Enterprises 25
using Reference Data for slow roll compensation 178 user rights required to view basic alarm settings 98
Reference documents, linking to 11 Sessions
Reference points, Speed Reference Points 59 adding plots to a new Plot Session 149
Rename Custom Bargraph Sessions defined 143
renaming Plot Groups and Plot Sessions 156 Plot Sessions defined 143
Restart, Automatic DAQ restart 20 Setpoints
Rod position plots showing alarm setpoint levels in plots 171
defined 231 viewing alarm setpoints in the Bargraph format 90
creating a rod position plot 254 viewing basic alarm settings 98
important features of a rod position plot 255 Settings, plot settings
rod drop mode 236 adjusting plot settings in the Plot Group
Rod Position Paired Variables 237 Configuration window 168
Routes saving current plot settings 176
defined 64 Severity
downloading a Route to a Snapshot 130 filtering by Severity Level 85
removing the alarm status for a Route 95 System 1 alarm severities 71
uploading data from a Snapshot route 129 Shaft centerline plots 195
RuleDesk 11 Shortcuts
Sample database 6 Event Manager shortcuts 89
Sample Filtering 186 launching a Plot Group quickly 152
Save quickly adjusting the scaling of a plot 186
saving a Plot Session 156 Show Event Data 173
saving data for future reference 291 Shutdown data 285
Scaling Slow roll compensation
plot scaling 169 collecting slow roll reference data 124
 Index 301

Smart Notifier 12 X vs Y plots 201

Snapshot Portable Data Collector Status
alarms for portable data collectors 94 determining the status of a DAQ computer 16
downloading a route to a Snapshot 130 filtering alarms by status 79
removing the alarm status from a portable data list current alarm and status types 80
collection route 95 Point Status notifications 76
Route defined 64 Step curve option 172
Snapshot Vibration Variables 58 Stoplight icon 76
uploading data from a Snapshot data collector 129 Storage, data storage
Software alarms. See Management alarms Change Filtering and data storage requirements 112
Software applications Synchronize Cursors
associating external applications with Enterprise defined 174
components 48 correlating data using 282
Sounds linking data in a tabular list to another plot 229
assigning a sound to an alarm 107 System 1
Spectral Band Variable Change Filtering and system performance 112
typical uses of the Spectral Band Variable 102 data acquisition 4
viewing Spectral Band settings 102 databases 4
Spectrum plots default data import and export rates 111
defined 213 flow of data 2
cascade and waterfall plots 222 overview 1
identifying a frequency line 216 principal software components 3
Speed Input Points 58 security and User Rights 15
Speed Reference Points 59 startup sequence 14
SQL Server System 1 Plot and Variable compatibilities 142
Embedded Edition versus Standard Edition 6 System 1 Tools 10
starting an SQL Server 16 System 1 Extenders 11
verifying that SQL Server is running 15 Tabular lists 228
Starting System 1 14 Tag Name 54
Startup data 285 TDI. See Transient Data Interface
Static data TDXnet
defined 55 data collected during a transient event 122
data collection rate 110 initialization 10
entering data manually 136 sample TDXnet Collection Group 66
listing the static data for a variable in a Tabular Test Communication utility 10
list 228 see also Communications Processor
setting the static data update rate for plots 145 Test Communication utility 10
using Change Filtering to reduce storage require- Timebase plots 203
ments 113 Toolbars
using compensation for static data 178 controlling the visibility and position of 44
Static variable plots creating a customized toolbar 45
defined 188 Tools
Bode plots 192 System 1 Database Tools 10
polar plots 192 Tooltips 45
shaft centerline plots 195 Train
trend plots 190 defined 52
302 Index

listing alarms for a machine train 81 How do I view data along a machine train? 280
sample machine train view 56 I see blinking colors 266
viewing data along a machine train 280 This data is interesting. How do I save it for
Transducer measurements. See Points future reference? 291
Transient Data Interface Why did my machine train trip last night? 289
data collected during a transient event 123 Utility programs 10
see also Communications Processor Variables
Transient event defined 55
defined 105 adding Variables to a Plot Group 150
data collection during transient operation 122 Association and data relationships 65
disabling Management alarms during transient changing the Variable associated with a curve 177
events 105 controlling which Variables are displayed 57
finding startup and shutdown data 285 discovering correlations between different
observing historical data associated with a tran- Variables with an X vs Y plot 201
sient event 222 displaying synchronous and asynchronous
Trend plots Variables in Orbit timebase plots 203
defined 190 examining Reference Data 126
launching a trend plot for the Variable that launching a trend plot for the Variable that
alarmed 289 alarmed 289
Trip Multiply list of Vibration Point Variables 58
as used by monitoring systems 105 listing the static data for a variable in a Tabular
Troubleshooting list 228
locating the source of the problem 78 plot and Variable compatibilities 142
using correlation and comparison to troubleshoot Variables in the Plot Group window 161
a process 266 viewing the basic alarm settings for a Variable 98
Types of Points 58 Vector compensation 178
Unacknowledged alarm 74 Verification
Under Alarm verifying DAQ communication 77
defined 101 verifying that Display is receiving data 37
viewing alarm settings 98 Vibration Points
User Defined Sample Filtering 187 defined 59
User List, for accessing Enterprises 25 associating speed input with Vibration Points 66
User Name 54 View
User rights defined 42
defined 15 creating a plot or Plot Group from a View 153
user rights required to view basic alarm settings 98 sample machine train view 56
User scenarios View menu 50
An alarm occurred last night. Why? 291 Viewer, License Viewer utility 10
How do I compare today's behavior with yester- Waterfall plots 222
day's? 275 Waveform compensation 178
How do I correlate data from different sources? 282 Waveform data plots 178
How do I determine how my Enterprise behaved Window
in the past? 272 displaying multiple plots in a Plot Group 164
How do I determine what is going on now? 268 the Plot Group Configuration window 168
How do I find and look at my startup and shut- understanding the Plot Group window 160
down data? 285 X vs Y plots 201